Home

i960 Processor Software Utilities User`s Guide

1. This results in a call to the built in name which is then passed the rest of the arguments This can be used if name has been given another definition that has covered the original Conditionals Loops and Recursion mpp960 macros can contain tests and other elements that cause them to evaluate differently at run time Testing Macro Definitions There are two different built in conditionals in mpp960 The first is ifdef ifdef name string 1 string 2 which makes it possible to test whether a macro is defined or not If name is defined as a macro ifdef expands to st ring 1 otherwise to string 2 If string 2 is omitted it is taken to be the empty string according to the normal rules ifdef foo foo is defined foo is not defined gt foo is not defined define foo gt ifdef foo foo is defined foo is not defined gt foo is defined Macro Processor mpp960 Comparing Strings The ifelse conditional is much more powerful than ifdef You can use ifelse asa way to introduce a long comment as an if else construct or as a multibranch depending on the number of arguments supplied ifelse comment ifelse string 1 string 2 equal not equal ifelse string 1 string 2 equal When ifelse is used with only one argument it discards the argument and produces
2. 3 The following assigns the first word aligned address after the location counter to the mark1 symbol If osec1 completely fills mem1 the mark1 value is 0x40000 in the next configured memory region MEMORY meml o 0x00000 1 0x02000 mem3 o 0x40000 1 0x05000 n ECTIONS osecl gt meml markl ALIGN 4 SIZEOF Finding Section Sizes To find the size in bytes of a section use SIZEOF Linker Command Language SIZEOF section section is the name of a located section The following example locates and sizes the out 1 output section The outsz1 and outsz2 symbols acquire identical values SECTIONS outl 4 st_ol out end_ol outszl end_ol st_ol outsz2 SIZEOF outl1 STARTUP Specifying a Startup File The syntax for the STARTUP directive is STARTUP filename filename specifies the file to be linked first Specifying a file with STARTUP links the file first This is similar to SYSLIB except that with sysu1B the file is linked after all other object files and libraries See page A 31 for more information on SYSLIB To find the file specified with STARTUP the linker follows the search algorithm described in the Search Paths section The c startup linker option overrides the STARTUP directive as described in the Option Reference section A 27 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 28 You can also use an asterisk to in
3. Storage Decimal Class Value C_BLOCK 100 C_FCN 101 C_EOS 102 C_FILE 103 C_ALIAS 105 C_HIDDEN 106 Hexadecimal Value Argument Value 0x0064 relocatable address 0x0065 relocatable address 0x0066 size 0x0067 symbol table entry index for next file symbol 0x0069 tag index Ox006A relocatable address A symbol with storage class C_FILE has a value that points to the next file symbol in the symbol table or the beginning of the global symbols in the case of the last file symbol Before files are linked the value of the file symbol is zero Relocatable address symbols have a value equal to the address of the symbol When the linker relocates the section the value of the symbol changes Section Number Field The section number field indicates the section in which a symbol is defined Table C 15 shows the defined constants used to refer to this field C 27 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 15 Section Number Field Section Symbol Name Number Definition N_DEBUG 2 symbolic debugging symbol including tag names for structures unions or enumerations typedefs and name of file N_ABS 1 absolute symbol not relocatable N_UNDEF 0 undefined external symbol N_SCNUM any integer gt 0 section number in which symbol is defined Absolute symbols include automatic and register variables function arguments and eos symbols The text data and bss symbols default to sect
4. OSD319 The Archive Identification String The archive identification string identifies a file as an archive Each archive library begins with a special string For example these two lines define the archive identification string define ARMAG lt arch gt n archive identification string define SARMAG 8 length of archive identification string C 43 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide This string appears as the first eight characters in an archive This string must be present or the archiver cannot recognize this file as common archive file format CAFF Archive Members Figure C 5 Archives can contain the following combinations of file types e COFF and ASCII text e COFF only e b out format only Archive members are arranged in sequential order within the library Figure C 5 represents a typical member such as Member K of the archive shown in Figure C 4 An Archive Member C 44 Archive Header Member name Text size File information Contents Padding Character n pad to even byte OSD320 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF The member header begins with the member name to identify the module within the archive Several additional entries containing control information follow this string A special trailer string terminates each archive member header The structure in Example C 11 defines the archive me
5. 0x0020 2 The following quad word aligns out sec SECTIONS outsec ALIGN 16 0x1000 fl o text 0x100 f2 o text 3 0 text A 20 Linker Command Language 3 In this example The s2_start symbol points to the beginning of infile2 ss2 section ss2 from input file infile2 The s2_end symbol points to the last byte of infile2 ss2 SECTIONS outscl infilel ss1l s2_start infile2 ss2 s2_end 1 4 In this example the symbol mark points to the first full word beyond the end of the data section of file1 o Four bytes are reserved by the 4 statement for a run time initialization of mysymbol representing a long integer SECTIONS outscl filel o data ALIGN 4 mysymbol 4 file2 o data 5 This example does the following aligns the data output section on the next 0x2000 byte boundary after the text output section defines the als symbol to point to the next 0x8000 byte boundary after the data input sections SECTIONS text data ALIGN 0x2000 data als ALIGN 0x8000 A 21 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 22 Defining Non standard Sections DSECT COPY NOLOAD You can create output sections that e overlay other sections e contain complete and exact copies of the input sections e contain no data Specify the non standard section keywords with or without p
6. cccccceeeeeeeeee DOS No Longer Supported as a HOSt c ccesssssseeeeeeeeees Invocation Command line cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Invocation Names aes ctincns reer tenntivenlereantinramemenlcrmeniaseuiss Options Arguments and Modifiers ceceeee File System Dependencies cccceesessceceeeeeeeeeeees Archiver arc960 gar960 NPV CATION iaci ii ra RAE TAR G EE ARTA Option and Modifier Arguments ccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeees Specifying the Object Module Format eeeeee Temporary Directory ssciicsceck ceectaeeseisechevactteceseaschueeteeeecs Option and Modifier Reference ssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeees COFF ELF b out Converter cof960 objcopy INVOCANOM si iste So nantantece seed anidialicaii an a e Output File Specification scccecieisesssceseeheeeriicteeeeeeee COFF to IEEE 695 Converter cvt960 VOCATION scier a AE E AA Aaa Limitations err etea aa a AA ERA riait Position independent Code Data and Symbols Archives and Relocatable Objects cccceeceeeees Unreferenced TypeS soosenneeeeesooreerrrnrresorrrenernereeene iii i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Global Uninitialized Symbols 0 eect ee eeeeeeeeeees 4 3 Compilation Assembly Information ceeeeeeeees 4 4 COFF Line Numbers 5 cccccsseskivetiececsessethtins ste caeenseeeeeetii
7. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennneeeeeeees 8 8 Defining a Macro 22 Xoo pate luo tenr die Ries eae 8 8 Arguments to Macros csecceeeesseeeeeeeeneeeeeessnneeeeeeaes 8 9 Special Arguments to M CIrOS ceeseeeeeesneeeeeeeeees 8 10 Deleting a Macro scctiecccccs cs seceetitaeceesceteeceditanceessaseuvessiense 8 11 Renaming Macros wisvik Ae ees one one 8 12 Temporarily Redefining MacroS c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 13 Indirect Call Of MACIrOS cccccceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeees 8 13 Indirect Call of Built inS cece eeeceeececeeeeeeceesenseeneees 8 14 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Conditionals Loops and RECUISION ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 8 14 Testing Macro Definitions ccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteee 8 14 Comparing Strings vi scesiecedesaseshevestte scence selennste cqvease veined s 8 15 Loops and POGUISlON i creceitroloaptseicnuden rane yere Auvntadl 8 16 How to Debug Macros and INpUt eeeeeeeeereeee rete 8 16 Displaying Macro Definitions ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeetees 8 16 Tracing Macro Calls cicscieickerivsescrataxcreieiienea iecienerd 8 17 Controlling Debugging Output cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 18 Saving Debugging Output ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 19 Input Control Roper ener ete Seep ee Sonia Reg rrr oer Pires er CUBE OE 8 19 Deleting Whitespace in INDUt ceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 8 19 C
8. NN Id TY n4 TY n4 NN Id TY n3 TY n4 TY n5 TY n6 TY n7 TY n8 TY n9 TY n10 NN Id TY n3 TY n4 TY n5 TY n6 TY n7 TY n8 TY n9 TY n10 continued amp HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Table D 2 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Representation of High level Types continued Definition Type parameters IEEE Record Field C array with lower bound 0 name or null name NN Id Mnemonic Z zero based array A 5A TY n3 type index of component TY n4 high bound note 1 TY n5 Bitfield type type name NN Id Mnemonic g g 67 TY n3 signed O unsigned 1 signed TY n4 size in bits 1 through n TY n5 base type index TY n6 procedure with compiler procedure name NN Id dependencies x 78 TY n4 Mnemonic x executable attribute note 2 TY n4 frame_type note 4 TY n5 push_mask note 5 TY n6 return_type TY n7 of arguments note 3 TY n8 ist argument type TY n9 2nd argument type TY n10 additional argument types level note 6 TY n11 thru nN TY n9 or TY nNN 1 NOTE 1 When the upper limits in array types A and Z are unknown as for external references the number of elements should be set to 1 NOTE 2 The attribute parameter of the function type X or x is bit mask of Bit Meaning Bit Meaning 0 Unknown frame Set if this 5 PASCAL nested always clear is a leaf procedure 6 no push mask available
9. SEO Record type Id1 Processor e g 80960CORE Id2 Module name D 11 D 12 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 4 Table D 4 shows the 1960 processor names that tools consuming HP MRI IEEE 695 object files recognize in the 1d1 field of the MB record Processor Names Name Processor Family 80960CORE Intel i960 core architecture 80960KA Intel i960 KA SA 80960KB Intel i960 KB SB 80960CA Intel i960 CA CF 80960JX Intel i960 JA JD JF JL RP 80960HX Intel i960 HA HD HT Address Descriptor AD The AD record describes the characteristics of the target processor SEC 8 4 SCC SEC Record type 8 Number of bits minimum address unit 4 Number of minimum address units constituting the largest address form SCC L Low address of field contains least significant byte Assign Value To Variable WO ASW0O The ASWO record contains a file byte offset pointer to the AD Extension record relative to the beginning of the file A zero 0 value indicates that this extension is not included in the file SE2 D7 00 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Part section HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Assign Value To Variable W1 ASW1 The ASW1 record contains a file byte offset pointer to the Environmental record relative to the beginning of the file A zero 0 value indicates that this extension is not included in the file SE2 D7
10. The error output of she11 command is not a part of the expansion It appears along with the error output of mpp960 Note that the expansion of esyscmd has a trailing newline This is not available on Windows hosts Exit Codes Use sysval to see whether a shell command succeeded sysval This expands to the exit status of the last shell command run with syscmd or esyscmd This is not available on Windows hosts Making Names for Temporary Files Commands specified to syscmd or esyscmd might need a temporary file for output or for some other purpose Use the built in macro maketemp to make temporary filenames maketemp template This expands to a name of a non existent file made from the string template which should end with the string xxxxxx The six xs are then replaced usually with something that includes the process ID of the mpp960 process in order to make the filename unique Macro Processor mpp960 Several calls of maketemp might expand to the same string since the selection criteria is whether the file exists or not If a file has not been created before the next call the two macro calls might expand to the same name Printing Error Messages You can print error messages using errprint errprint message which simply prints message and the rest of the arguments on the standard error output The expansion of errprint is void errprint Illegal arguments to forloop error gt Ill
11. e Invoking the linker with g1d960 uses the G960ARCH environment variable 7 25 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 26 Table 7 3 SA KA SB KB l Cx JX Hx Rx COREO CORE1 CORE2 c TD 5 CORE3 e With I1960ARCH or G960ARCH undefined the default architecture is KB regardless of the invocation command Specifying a with no valid argument causes a fatal error New Architecture Options The linker now accepts AJT ARP ARD ARM ARN and AVH architecture switches or environment variable settings The following table shows the input output compatibilities of all supported architectures Supported Input Output Architecture Combinations Output KA KB Cx Jx Hx Rx CORE0O CORE1 CORE2 CORE3 C C NA NA NA MA NA NA NA NA NA C NA NA NA MA NA NA NA NA NA NA C NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA C C NA NA NA C NA NA NA NA NA C NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA C C C C NA C NA NA NA NA C C C C NA C NA C Cc C C C NA NA Cc C C NA NA NA C C NA NA NA C NA NA NA C C C NA NA NA C C C compatible NA incompatible Warning issued Linker Ink960 gld960 Libraries The linker uses the architecture specific standard libraries for an HLL directive without arguments The provided directive files such as eva 14d contain the appropriate library directives The designated architecture also affects the library names generated from the 1 library option Example The following links proto o fora
12. gt 0 nargs gt 1 nargs argl arg2 arg3 gt 3 The notation can be used in the expansion text to denote all the actual arguments unquoted with commas in between For example define echo gt echo arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 gt argl arg2 arg3 arg4 Macro Processor mpp960 Use the notation when each argument should be quoted It is just like except that it quotes each argument This is a simple example define echo SQ gt echo argl arg2 arg3 arg4 gt argl arg2 arg3 arg4 Where did the quotes go They were removed when the expanded text was reread by mpp960 To show the difference try define echol gt define echo2 Q gt define foo This is macro foo gt echol foo gt This is macro This is macro foo echo2 foo gt This is macro foo A sign in the expansion text that is not followed by anything that mpp960 understands is simply copied to the macro expansion as is any other text define foo hello gt foo gt hello If you want a macro to expand to a value such as 12 put a pair of quotes after the This prevents mpp960 from interpreting the sign as a reference to an argument Deleting a Macro A macro definition can be removed with undefine undefine name which removes the macro name The macro name must be quoted s
13. symbol is the symbol name Finding the symbol in the global symbol table returns 1 In the following example the value of begin is preserved if begin already exists in the global symbol table otherwise begin is set to the location counter begin DEFINED begin begin ADDR ALIGN NEXT Finding Addresses To find the absolute beginning address of a section use ADDR ADDR sect ion section is the name of a located section For an address aligned after the current location counter use ALIGN or NEXT ALIGN expr NEXT expr expr is an alignment factor A 25 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 26 For memory with no unconfigured regions ALIGN and NEXT are equivalent ALIGN returns the next address in configured memory that fits the specified boundary NEXT returns the next unallocated address that fits the boundary Examples 1 The following locates the osec1 output section in the mem1 memory region and assigns the osec1 beginning address to the begin_1 symbol SECTIONS osecl osecl gt mem1 begin_1l ADDR osecl 2 The following assigns the first word aligned address after the location counter to the mark1 symbol If osec1 completely fills mem1 the mark1 value is 0x02000 in unconfigured memory MEMORY meml o 0x00000 1 0x02000 mem3 o 0x40000 1 0x05000 SECTIONS osecl gt meml markl NEXT 4
14. Examples The following examples assume that you compile and execute the following source file named compare c compare c include lt stdio h gt main argc argv int argc char argv int nl n2 if argc 3 printf Usage compare nl n2 n exit 0 nl atoi argv 1 n2 atoi argv 2 Coverage Analyzer gcov960 printf Use integers larger that zero n exit 0 if nl n2 printf n d equals d n nl n2 else ir tH lt i printf n d is less than d n nl n2 else printf n d is greater than d n nl n2 To compile compare c use the command gcec960 Fcoff fprof Z pdb ACF Tmcycx compare c The above command creates the directory pdb if it doesn t exist already to store the program database information and generates an absolute module named a out which can be downloaded and executed on a Cyclone board with a 1960 CF processor module The following command creates the file containing the profile information using mondb mondb ser a out 10 10 This command creates a file called default pf Once you have the default pf file you can copy it to a file with a different name such as default old You can then use mondb again to create a new profile with a different set of data for example mondb ser a out 10 20 5 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Example 1 e The gcov960 invocation gcov960 c Z pdb e produces the cove
15. Instructs the disassembler to output symbol labels rather their values for any symbols for which you have specified the absolute address This option works in conjunction with the s lowercase option which instructs the disassembler to perform symbolic disassembly displays the object file symbol table entries or an archive s symbol list displays the disassembled section as assembly language regardless of the section type displays the dumper version and creation date and continues processing displays the dumper version and creation date and stops processing is ignored unless used with t Displays the symbol table entries as hexadecimal numbers instead of a symbolic translation of debug information By default the dumper produces symbolic information suppresses the translation of zeros into word directives for text type disassembly Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 Dumping Absolute Symbols The s option instructs the disassembler to output symbol labels rather than their values for any symbols for which you ve specified the absolute address This option works in conjunction with the s lowercase option which instructs the disassembler to perform symbolic disassembly For example with an object file created with the following instructions globl procl set procl 0xc callx procl callx Oxc addi procl r5 r6 If you use the following gdmp960 command line gdmp960 t2 0 s you would see
16. _b orb which selects a big endian library for Cx Jx and Hx applications _porp which indicates that the library contains position independent data PID _e ore which indicates a PID and big endian library for Cx Hx and Jx applications 7 21 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 22 arch is the architecture option specified by the linker command line It is one of ca for 1960 Cx Hx and Jx processor based applications jx for i1960 Jx processor tuned floating point libraries ka for i960 KA and SA processor based applications kb for i960 KB and SB processor based applications rp for i960 RP RD processor based applications The linker searches for each library name along a library search path determined by the linker invocation When you invoke the linker as g1d960 the search path is ye IR ND any path given with the 1 option any path given with the SEARCH_DIR directive the path given with the G960L1B environment variable the path given with the G960LL1B environment variable the path given with the G960BASE environment variable the current working directory When you invoke the linker as 1nk 960 the search path is or 6 any path given with the 1 option any path given with the SEARCH_DIR directive the path if any given with the 1960L1B environment variable the path if any given with the 1960LL1B environment variable the 1ib subdirectory of the pa
17. path is a directory to be searched for libraries For a complete description of the library search path see the Search Paths section The L option has the same effect as the SEARCH_DIR directive INCLUDE Including Additional Directive Files The syntax for the directive is INCLUDE config file config file is the name of the linker directive file You can specify the file to be included with a full pathname or with a filename The search algorithm differs according to the way you enter the file specification When you enter a full or relative pathname the linker searches only the specified directory for the file When you enter only a filename the linker searches for the file as follows e The INCLUDE directive is within a target file that is a file specified with the TARGET directive or the T target linker option The linker searches for the file according to the algorithm described in the Search Paths section e The INCLUDE directive is in any other directive file The linker searches only the current directory for the specified file Linker Command Language TARGET Using the Search Path for Directive Files The syntax for the directive is TARGET filename filename is the directive filename for your target system The linker follows the search algorithm described in the Search Paths section to find a directive file The TARGET directive has the same effect as the T linker option
18. ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN FO index null_name SF1 CE index FOOH 40 32 of ATN ASNs currently between 3 and 10 inclusive E2 CE index tool_code SE2H CE index type_rule SE2 CEHindex pointer_size SF1 SCE index 00 41 compiler_version_string SE2 CE index year E2 CE index month SE2 CE index day SE2 CE index hour SE2 CE index minute E2H CE index second was ee continued amp HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Table D 10 Miscellaneous Record Codes continued Misc Type Code Meaning variable 63 Call optimization information i960_ procedure Purpose meaning Holds the sysproc leafproc information for the most recent public or external Position In the Public External Part after NI ATI ASI triples or after NX records in relocatable files Syntax Code 63 proc_type system_index bal_address NN FO index null_name ATN F1 CE index OOH 3F 3F _of_ATN ASN s 1 or 2 ASN E2 H CE index proc_type ASN E2 CE index bal_address Parameter meanings proc_type 0 if unknown 1 if leaf procedure 2 if system table procedure system_index index into the system_table used only if proc_type 2 bal_address branch and link address used only if proc_type 1 For more information on compiler identification see the ident directive in the 1960 Processor Assembler User s Guide D 47 Index A a After archiv
19. Default Action takes no action generates no memory map sends memory map if generated to stdout for most errors suppresses the output file optimizes the callj and calljx pseudo instructions produces a out for COFF output b out for b out format output and e out for ELF format output adds no profiling instrumentation does not mark output as position independent includes the entire file removes the relocation entries continued amp 7 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 10 Table 7 1 Linker Options continued Name Option Effect Default Action Strip S s S removes only the debug retains the symbolic Section start address Target Suppress multiple definition symbol warnings Unresolved symbol Version Verbose Version stop Warnings Bsection addr T bss data text addr Tfilename usymbol v960 information from the output file s removes all symbolic information from the output file assigns section addresses uses the full search path for directive filename with the same effect as a TARGET directive suppress warnings of multiple symbol definitions even if they differ in size puts an unresolved symbol in the symbol table displays linker version information displays linker progress displays the linker version information and stops linking suppresses warnings except symbol table warnings informa
20. and filenames identifying tool input and or output Some tools have more than one invocation name for compatibility with earlier versions of the tools See Compatibility on page 1 1 Overview Options Arguments and Modifiers Invocation command options must be preceded with a special character that identifies them as options On Windows this can be either the hyphen character or the slash character On UNIX this is the hyphen character Case is significant in command options arguments and modifiers unless the argument is a Windows pathname element Some invocation options require or accept arguments and some invocation options have optional modifiers Some of the tools can be used without options modifiers or filenames depending on the tool s default settings Refer to the chapter describing the desired software tool for information on its invocation options File System Dependencies You must observe the conventions and restrictions of your host environment s file system Since the example commands in this manual are from the UNIX environment they work in Windows only if you use the backslash character in pathnames rather than the slash character Archiver arc960 gar960 Use the archiver to create and maintain archive files of e ASCII and COFF files in text or mixed format archives e COFF files in COFF libraries e b out format files in b out libraries e ELF format files in ELF librar
21. applies all command line options to each member of an archive file displays the file headers disassembles the specified COFF or ELF function continued amp Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 Table 6 1 dmp960 gdmp960 Options continued Option glarg n name O filename Effect dumps one or more debug_ sections The default argument is i debug_info Use the following arguments to specify a different section or multiple sections dump debug_info default argument dump debug_line dump debug_frame dump debug_pubnames dump debug_aranges dump debug_macinfo dump all debug_ sections gt 23 voo gt 77 displays the section headers displays help information and exits displays the COFF optional header displays the line numbers displays the memory map section layout of the file displays the requested information for only the specified section displays the requested information for only the specified file within an archive displays the disassembled addresses in octal The default is hex suppresses all the header displays producing a parseable output queries the file and displays its type displays the relocation information used with d puts symbols in the disassembly in place of addresses continued amp 6 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 6 4 Table 6 1 dmp960 gdmp960 Options continued Option S v960 Effect
22. move dhry mkimage dhry dhryston split dhryston 65536 16 65536 8 dhryston ihex dhryston 00 dhryston even ihex dhryston 01 dhryston odd Related Topics mkimage split 12 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 12 10 map Reports the section addresses section sizes and the image size map infile infile is the filename to be placed in ROM Discussion Use map to show how the rommer has restructured the file The map directive displays the following on the stdout standard output device e the address and size of each file section e the size in bytes of the projected ROM image You can use map to display information while building a ROM image interactively or from a directive file Examples 1 The following shows the data section located in the input file immediately after the text section map a out Section name Physical address Size text 0x040000000 0x5b90 data 0x040005b90 0x938 bss 0x600000000 0x118c Image made from a out will be 25800 decimal bytes long ROM Image Builder rom960 2 The following shows the text section placed at address 0 and data still at 0x40005b90 When created with mkimage the space between the sections is filled with zeroes note the image size move a out text 0x0 map a out Section name Physical address Size text 0 0x5b90 data 0x40005b90 0x938 bss 0x60000000 0x118c Image made from a out will be 1073767624 decimal bytes l
23. n2 n3 n4 n5 SF8 SOB 0 Id n2 Record Type Block Type 11 module section Block size in bytes 0 unknown Zero length name section name already defined Section type 0 Mixture of code data etc HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D n3 Section index n4 Offset in minimum address units Optional fields may be null but if any field is null and a later field is present the omitted field must be filled with the 80 construct The relationship of blocks to variable attribute and variable value records NN ASN ATN records is preserved in the file For variables that have an NN ASN ATN triple these records must be together in the block structure definition i e there can be no BB nor BE records between them Block definitions may be nested Variable Names NN These NN records declare variable names type names and line numbers The IEEE 695 Trial Use standard has been extended to allow duplicate local symbols to be defined as long as the indices and the scoping are different This provides symbol definitions that are local to a specific section SFO n Id SFO Record type n Name index number must be gt 31 0 31 are reserved Id Name Define Types TY The TY record specifies that a type name represents an explicit type definition other than the implicit types predefined for use with HP MRI language variables Different types with the same name may be declared This is supported by this specif
24. processor software toolset contain position independent code pd selects libraries with position independent data For more information on library selection see the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 and the L option in this section By default files are linked as position dependent If you use these switches and the files are not marked as position independent the linker issues a warning message For information on generating position independent code and data see your compiler user s guide For information on marking unlinked object files for position independence see the assembler user s guide For information on the position independent and position dependent libraries see the library supplement 7 47 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 48 When the linker directive file contains HLL the linker chooses default libraries according to the position independent flag R Read Symbols Only Includes only the symbols from an object file R Discussion To read all the symbol names and addresses from an input object file specify R The rest of the input file is not relocated or included in your linked output With R your output file can refer symbolically to non relocatable locations defined in other programs Example The following command links only symbols from file1 o and includes all of file2 o in the linked output 1nk960 R filel o file2 o Linke
25. 1 Near always clear always set 2 Far always clear 7 Interrupt always clear 3 Re entrant always set 9 32 To be defined 4 ROMable always set NOTE 3 of arguments 1 if unknown NOTE 4 The frame type indicates the type of stable frame used by the routine cvt960 sets the frame type to 0 NOTE 5 The push_mask is always set to 0 NOTE 6 _ the level parameter is always set to 0 D 8 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 3 Built in Types Table D 3 identifies the implicit or built in types supported by the cvt960 program The built in types represent C type definitions for common scalar types and pointers to common scalar types that are implicit to the compiler assembler linker and debugger As for complex types the type number or mnemonic letter code for built in types implies the size and organization of the program object The type number also specifies a default type name for use by HP or MRI debugging tools in referring to the built in type Built in types normally do not require additional information other than the type number to completely describe them Only the number of the built in type is used in an ATN record describing a symbol having one of the implicit types It is also the number used in the definitions for more complex types that have elements that are of built in type The shorthand notation for implicit types is intended to minimize the size of object mod
26. 13 Ch 14 Ch 15 Ch 16 Overview Table 1 2 Compatibility Code generated by Release 6 5 is fully compatible with code generated with the Release 5 0 5 1 and 6 0 tools Further source programs compiled with Release 5 0 are accepted by Release 6 5 without change Almost all environment variables and invocation options are unchanged Object modules generated with Release 5 0 5 1 6 0 can be linked with objects created with Release 6 5 However object modules compiled with Release 5 0 for the 1960 Rx processor should be recompiled with Release 6 5 in order to generate objects that are forward compatible with future i960 Rx processors The software utilities also accept output from CTOOLS960 Release 3 0 and later and from GNU 960 Release 1 2 and later Compatibility Invocation Names Table 1 2 lists the invocation names to use for backwards compatibility with GNU 960 Release 1 3 and later and for backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 Release 3 5 and later Only tools with more than one name are listed in this table In some cases using the alternate invocation name causes the tool to behave differently Invocation name details are provided in the chapter for the tool in question Invocation Names for Backwards Compatibility Utility GNU 960 CTOOLS960 See archiver gar960 arc960 Ch 2 b out COFF ELF converter objcopy cof960 Ch 3 4 dumper disassembler gdmp960 dmp960 Ch 6 linker gld960 Ink960 Ch 7 name lis
27. 4 000 16 bit ROM Image Words Long y Memory Image ROM command required to use either the permute a Or permute d command rom 1000 8 8 Quantity needed to fill the memory image Description of one ROM A0123 01 Examples 1 The following sets the length to 32767 bytes and the width to 8 bits for individual ROM images rom 32767 8 12 20 ROM Image Builder rom960 2 The following sets the length to 65536 bytes and the width to 8 bits and by specifying four ROM images of those dimensions establishes 262144 bytes as the expected image size rom 65536 8 4 Related Topics mkimage permute sh Executes a host system command sh command command is the host system command to be executed Discussion To execute a command on your host system use sh When the command completes the rommer continues executing Examples 1 The following lists the current directory on UNIX sh ls l 2 The following lists the current directory in Windows sh dir 12 21 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide split Specifies the output image sizes split image m length m width r length r width name image is the binary filename to be split m length is the length in bytes of the memory image to be split m width is the width in bits of the memory image to be split r length is the ROM image length in bytes r width is the ROM image width in bits name is a base name for the various im
28. NUMbBOr FORM atteccccceds cveriie nananana a D 3 Name Format ccccccceseececeeeeeceeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaens D 3 Information Variables ccccccceseeceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseaeaeees D 4 Line N MDErS areira a a D 5 TYPE Srii eaa a E a aeaea D 5 Object File Components ccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee D 10 Header Pa a A E D 11 AD Extension Partien nten e D 14 Environmental Pa ea D 15 External Pai hananman daana D 17 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide xii Debug Information Part ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeee Data ets Rane E E S E E N Trailer Patioen ct ls a a T a HP MPI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics AD Extension Part and Environment Paft Public External Part ccccccccsssseeceeseseseeeseeeneeeeeaeaees Section Paltessiceccleiitesethitetes ies E DS DIG Fal tence osen tanh a ee adder BBI BlOCK area a Ae A O a atni ajeg o o OA A E E BB4 and BB6 BIOCKS ccccccceeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaens BB5 and BB10 BIOCKS cccccccseseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteaees Miscellaneous RecordS cc ceeceeeeeeeeeeseatseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees Module Miscellaneous ReCOrdsS ccccccccccesssseeeeeeeees Variable Miscellaneous RecordS cccccccccsssssssseeeeeeeees Procedure Miscellaneous Records ccccccsseeeeeseseeeeees General Syntax Rules ccccceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeees Parame
29. Note that section_name and section_names mean that if any input sections named sect ion_name exist and are not already placed in an output section place them in this output section For example the following code produces an error if bar o is the only input object file SECTIONS foo bar o junk COMMON However the following example does not produce an error because as it is evaluating COMMON bar o COMMON is available SECTIONS junk COMMON foo ber o Files and sections are bound top to bottom and left to right in linker directive files Splitting COFF Output Sections The common object file format COFF allows only 65535 line number entries and 65535 relocation entries for any section within an object file The linker creates additional output sections whenever adding another input section to an existing output section overflows the line number entry table or the relocation entry table To split a section the linker e creates a new section with the original section name starting with the first input section that does not fit completely in the original section e assigns a new name to the original output section by appending a number to the original section name truncated as necessary to limit the new section name to eight characters For example e Splitting the mybgtxt section once assigns the name mybgtx0 to the original output section and creates a new s
30. Notes no yes no no yes no yes no no yes yes yes 1 no 1 no yes no 2 no 2 no 2 no no 3 no continued amp COFF to IEEE 695 Converter cvt960 Table 4 2 Mappings Between COFF and IEEE 695 Built in Types continued IEEE 695 Valid in Code COFF Concept Meaning Public Part Notes 32 DT_PTR p unknown type no 33 DT_PTR p void return no 34 DT_PTR p 8 bit signed no 35 DT_PTR p 8 bit unsigned no 36 DT_PTR p 16 bit signed no 37 DT_PTR p 16 bit unsigned no 38 DT_PTR p 32 bit signed no 39 DT_PTR p 32 bit unsigned no 40 n a p 64 bit signed no 41 n a p 64 bit unsigned no 42 DT_PTR p 32 bit float no 43 DT_PTR p 64 bit float no 44 DT_PTR p extended float no 1 45 n a p 128 bit float no 1 46 n a p quoted string no 47 DT_PTR p code address no 48 n a p stack push no 49 n a p stack push no 50 n a p stack push no 51 56 n a alias for above no 57 n a 64 bit BCD float no 3 58 255 reserved 1 Although ic960 allocates a 128 bit cell with base address to 24 for the C long double type the actual datum is 12 bytes long manipulated by load and store triple word instruction Thus the ic960 long double type maps to IEEE 695 built in type 12 even though its memory alignment might suggest built in type 13 2 These types correspond to stack pushes The converter does not produce them because the i960 processor family does not have explicit push instructions 3 The i960 process
31. The raw data for each section follows the list of section headers If a section has data the s_scnptr field in its section header points to it see Figure C 2 For a section with no raw data a bss section for example the s_scnptr field contains a null value Relocation Table C 7 A relocation entry is used by the linker It consists of the address at which relocation should occur the index of the relevant symbol in the symbol table and the type of relocation required Table C 7 shows relocation entry format Relocation Entry Format Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 3 long int r_vaddr address of reference 4 7 long int r_symndx symbol table index 8 9 unsigned short r_type relocation type 10 11 char padder 2 padding not used Table C 8 contains relocation types defined for the i960 processor C 11 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 8 Relocation Types Decimal Hexadecimal Mnemonic Value Value Definition R_RELLONG 17 0x0011 direct 32 bit relocation R_RELSHORT 22 0x0016 direct 12 bit relocation R_IPRSHORT 24 0x0018 unimplemented R_IPRMED 25 0x0019 IP relative relocation R_IPRLONG 26 0x001A 32 bit IP relative relocation R_OPTCALL 27 0x001B optimizable call callj R_OPTCALLX 28 0x001C optimizable call calljx R_GETSEG 29 0x001D unimplemented R_GETPA 30 0x001E unimplemented R_TAGWORD 31 0x001F unimplemented Relocation Entry Declaration The structure declaration for relocation entries
32. amp D 27 D 28 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 9 Attribute Numbers Blocks and Descriptions continued n3 62 63 64 65 Block 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 6 Description Procedure block misc followed by two fields that describe the most recent procedure block The first field Ix1 is the pmisc type identification number the second x2 is the number of additional ATN 65 or ASN records associated with this directive See the Miscellaneous Records section for the codes associated with this directive Variable misc followed by two fields that describe a variable The first field x1 is the vmisc type identification number the second x2 is the number of additional ATN 65 or ASN records associated with this directive See the Miscellaneous Records section for the codes associated with this directive Module misc followed by two fields that describe the current module block The first field x1 is the mmisc type identification number the second x2 is the number of additional ATN 65 and ASN records associated with this directive See the Miscellaneous Records section for the codes associated with this directive Misc string requires one field that is a string value for miscellaneous records 62 63 and 64 Value Records ASN The ASN records are used to define values for variables E2 SCE nl n2 E2CE Record type nl Symbol name index
33. callj call x is a leaf procedure It also changes the instruction to a calls when the target is a system procedure index In your assembly source use the call j and cal1jx pseudo instructions to be replaced as shown in Table 7 2 e When the pseudo instruction argument is a leaf procedure the linker substitutes a branch and link which is faster than a call e For system procedures the linker substitutes system calls providing convenient access to a set of kernel services e To prevent these optimizations use the o option Linker Ink960 gld960 Table 7 2 Branch and link and System call Optimization Pseudo instruction Storage Class Replaced By callj external static call leaf external bal system call calls calljx external static callx leaf external balx system call Ida index g13 calls g13 For a system call the processor refers to a system procedure table index provided as the calls argument e For an index from 0 to 31 with ca11j the linker generates a calls with a literal index constant e For an index from 0 to 259 with ca11jx the linker generates instructions to load the index into register g13 and perform the call as follows lda index g13 calls g13 Since register g13 is used avoid returning a structure longer than 16 bytes from a system procedure Instead return pointers to a structure The following cause out of range errors e using call j with an index greater than 31 e using calljx wi
34. include filename sinclude filename Macro Processor mpp960 Both of these cause the file named filename to be read by mpp960 When the end of the file is reached input is resumed from the previous input file The expansion of include and sinclude is therefore the contents of filename It is an error for an included file not to exist If you don t want error messages about non existent files use sinclude to include a file if it exists It expands to nothing if it does not exist Normally file inclusion is used to insert the contents of a file into the input stream The fact that include and sinclude expand to the contents of the file can be used to define macros that operate on entire files The use of include is important as files can contain quotes commas and parentheses that can interfere with the way the mpp960 parser works Searching for Include Files mpp960 allows included files to be found in directories other than the current working directory If a file is not found in the current working directory and the filename is not absolute mpp960 searches for the file in a specified search path The directories specified with the 1 option are searched first in the order found on the command line If the 19601NC environment variable is set it is expected to contain a colon separated list of directories which are searched in order If the automatic search for include files causes trouble the p debug flag can hel
35. new_profile compares two profiles The new profile is compared to the default or the profile specified with the p or iprof option and just hit or just missed lines are reported Multiple instances of this control and argument are supported The profiles specified are automatically merged together ignores hits from functions whose profiles are of increasing accuracy decreasing levels of interpolation nis 0 9 The default is Q9 which ignores hits for all functions except those with perfect profiles QO ignores hits for any functions even those with completely guessed profiles Coverage Analyzer gcov960 Table 5 1 gcov960 Controls continued Control Argument r h Effect produces annotated source listing produces the line numbers within the basic blocks that were hit You can also use the option to specify the directories searched produces the line numbers within basic blocks that were missed You can use the option to specify the directories searched Table 5 2 gcov960 Options Option Argument C h l search _dir p or iprof file Effect calculates the total number of execution counts in a profile prints help information adds directory to list that gcov960 searches for source files identifies profile to be used Default is default pf Multiple instances of this option and argument are supported The profiles specified are automatically merged together Ignores hits except from func
36. o 0x40000000 1 0x40000 SECTIONS text 0x040000000 data gt meml bss The following keeps the text data and bss sections together in the membase memory region Note that all of the sections are aligned per the input section requirements and that data immediately follows text and bss immediately follows data n ECTIONS GROUP etext data bss gt membase aA rae er eee Creating Gaps and Defining Symbols in Output Sections ALIGN BYTE FILL LONG SHORT dot A section gap contains no information To create a gap 1 Change the location counter represented by the dot symbol to insert a gap of any length filled with a repeated two byte value Use an initialization keyword to insert a byte half word or word value Linker Command Language Assign a new value to the location counter with either operator siz XDI ALIGN align expr operator is an or operator size expr evaluates to an offset address relative to the beginning of the output section or to a value to be used by the operator align expr evaluates to a power of 2 ALIGN returns the next address within the output section that is divisible by the align expr To specify a repeating two byte initialization value for the gaps in a section assign the fill value after the closing brace of the output section definition or use FILL within a section definiti
37. orbss 1d but you must append the filename and its extension when you use the T option Related Topics A architecture B L library directory Ttext Tdata t Suppress Multiple Definition Symbol Warnings Suppresses warning of multiple symbol definitions Discussion Use this option to suppress warnings of multiple symbol definitions even if they differ in size Related Topic w Warnings Linker Ink960 gld960 u Unresolved Symbol Places unresolved external symbol in the symbol table usymbol symbol names the symbol Discussion When creating programs of libraries only such as run time libraries build the symbol table with u This option introduces an unresolved external symbol into the output file symbol table The linker resolves the reference with the first module defining the symbol This option is useful when libraries are to be traversed in an order that prevents your application from linking Example The following example shows how to fetch the closure of components of printf 1nk960 rvu printf oprintf o lc i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide v Verbose Displays linker progress Discussion To display the files sought by the linker as the linker search progresses specify v The search messages appear on stdout V v960 Version Displays the linker version number and creation date V v960 Discussion To display a sign on message on stdout
38. start end where start is the new Start quote delimiter and end is the new end quote delimiter If any of the arguments are missing the default quotes and are used instead of the void arguments The expansion of changequote is void In this example the and characters are the new quote characters changequote gt define foo Macro foo gt foo gt Macro foo 8 20 Macro Processor mpp960 If no single character is appropriate start and end can be of any length changequote 1 gt define foo Macro f 00 gt foo gt Macro foo Changing the quotes to the empty strings effectively disables the quoting mechanism leaving no way to quote text define foo Macro FOO gt changequote gt foo gt Macro FOO foo gt Macro FOO There is no way in mpp960 to quote a string containing an unmatched left quote except using changequote to change the current quotes Neither quote string should start with a letter or _ underscore as they are confused with names in the input Doing so disables the quoting mechanism Changing Comment Delimiters The default comment delimiters can be changed with the built in macro changecom changecom start end where start is the new start comment delimiter and end is the new end comment delimiter If any of the arguments are void the default comment de
39. 01 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Part section Assign Value To Variable W2 ASW2 The ASW2 record contains a byte offset pointer to the module Section part relative to the beginning of the module A zero 0 value indicates that this part is not included in the module SE2 D7 02 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Part section Assign Value To Variable ASW3 The ASW3 record contains a byte offset pointer to the module External part relative to the beginning of the module A zero 0 value indicates that this part is not included in the module SE2 D7 03 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Part section Assign Value To Variable W4 ASW4 The ASW4 record contains a byte offset pointer to the module Debug Information definition part relative to the beginning of the module A zero 0 value indicates that this part is not included in the module SE2 D7 04 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Part section D 13 D 14 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Assign Value To Variable W5 ASW5 The ASWS record contains a byte offset pointer to the module Data part relative to the beginning of the module A zero 0 value indicates that this part is not included in the module SE2 D7 05 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Pa
40. 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Decrement and Increment Operators ceeeeeee 8 30 Evaluating Integer Expressions ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 8 30 Running Host Commands cicss scsessateasackrveaedeecscaetecssecetvass 8 31 Executing Simple Commands ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 31 Reading the Output of UNIX Command 068 8 32 EXI COdGS ain tuatGnuacnuter aac eae seats 8 32 Making Names for Temporary Files cceeeeeee 8 32 Printing Error Messages fa csracsrcsinte eetiescebteivetee tai Ser nids 8 33 Exiting 1FOMIMPP9G0 os croceraccscrsaicesatmeutietsteatetesentteneads 8 34 Compatibility with Other Macro Processors eee 8 34 Extensions IN Mpp960 iic c sceeceececcesceastestredeneest deneactonee 8 34 Facilities in UNIX System V m4 not in mpp960 8 36 Munger gmung960 Name Lister gnm960 nam960 ROM Image Builder grom960 INVOCATION E Sistcestisiedhisiia teenie aed naan 11 1 Using grom96 0 acc tenctetii ste cd ccpuneh E 11 3 Creating Binary Images c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 11 4 Converting the Image to Hex Files 11 4 EXaMDIG We E it vain E tokcegte couse ear oe th 11 5 Example 2 ais essa re E Sana Ea a EAE EES 11 5 EXample S Ganinpanti nnne ea e e 11 5 ROM Image Builder rom960 Rommer INVOCATION ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteananes 12 3 Directive Files ici ceesiecsscee
41. 12 8 ihex Example The following inserts three successive 32 bit checksums in the image erctest The first checksum result is used for the second and the second result is used for the third rom 32767 8 move hello mkimage hello crctest checksum crctest 0 8191 8192 32 checksum crctest 8192 16534 16535 32 checksum crctest 16535 32766 32767 32 Related Topic mkimage Translates an image to an Intel hexadecimal format ihex bin hex file mode bin is the name of the file to be translated hex file is the name of the hexadecimal output file mode specifies the hexadecimal address record format described below ROM Image Builder rom960 Discussion For downloading to an intelligent EPROM programmer translate a binary image into either of two Intel hexadecimal formats with inex For the address record format specify a mode as follows mode16 specifies a hexadecimal object file format with extended segment address records This format is used on Intel s 8086 series of 16 or 32 bit processors and also required by some PROM programmers mode32 specifies a hexadecimal object file format with extended linear address records This format is used on Intel s i960 processors Example The following translates a file named dhry into an executable image named dhryston splits the dhryston image into two parts and translates the two parts into new files in hexadecimal format for the PROM programming device
42. 27 Section Numbers and Storage Classes eeeeees C 28 TY DEAE AIRY enan a e E eel weet iueltemmel cece C 30 Type Entries and Storage Classes ssssseseeees C 32 Auxiliary Table Entries 0 cccccseceeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees C 33 Contents PIIGNAMES sek a heated a a EE C 35 MC CHONS essen ae kA GA PRA BN C 35 Tag Names sis ccabteesitaceies ti shageengastuuasdsaas tava Ea E C 36 End of StruCture cs 2002 ozs Sentdkie magn ect eet odie C 36 FUNCTIONS vce cca herve eo eek eet ec ole ou akc C 36 PULA Societe etx a a teen eet ee Set ett a C 37 End of Blocks and FunctionS ccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 38 Beginning of Blocks and Functions ccceeeee C 38 Names Related to Structures Unions and ENUMErattions cccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeesenegeeeeees C 38 Auxiliary Entry Declaration c cccceescceeeeeeeeeeeetneeeees C 39 String PADIS neren ihn e e a a dee ceedings C 41 AGGOSS ROULINGS sctiscccticc teed cactect de a C 42 Archive Library Format cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeteee C 42 The Archive Identification String cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 43 Archive M MDePS ccccccceeeeceeceeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeneeseeaeneeeeees C 44 The Symbol Tab Orr vessestcus cvsangarvrienenneeeapdereiecenttteapeaseiess C 47 Appendix D HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format TORMINOIOGY 5 a E D 2 NOM NClAtUPE istered oraninda eae na d D 3
43. 7 55 x Extract archiver option 2 21 Y Z y trace symbol linker option 7 56 Z Z program database linker option 7 57 z Suppress time stamp archiver option 2 22 z time stamp suppression linker option 7 57 Index 7
44. Archiver arc960 gar960 This section describes the options and modifiers alphabetically a After Modifier Positions members after a specified member a pname pname is the name of an archive member used as a positional reference Discussion By default the archiver places new members at the end of the archive To place new archive members immediately after an existing member use a with replace r and update u To reposition existing members use a with move m If you specify more than one position modifier the last one takes effect Examples 1 The following example places file2 o immediately after file1 oin libx at arc960 ma filel o libx a file2 o 2 The following example replaces existing members in 1ibo a with corresponding files from the current working directory positioning any new members immediately after filel o arc960 ra filel o libo a o 2 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 8 Related Topics Before Move Update Insert Replace b Before i Insert Modifier Positions members before a specified member b pname i pname pname is the name of the archive member used as a positional reference Discussion By default the archiver places new members at the end of the archive To place new archive members immediately before an existing member use b or i with replace r and update u To reposition existing members use b or i with move m If you
45. C 21 C 11 Symbol Name Field ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 23 C 12 Storage ClaSSes cceccececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaees C 23 C 13 Restricted Storage Classes eee C 25 C 14 Symbol Value Field ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 26 C 15 Section Number Field ccccceeecteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 28 C 16 Section Number and Storage Class C 29 C 17 Fundamental Type6Scscccaiecicoa ties nnlesa tage C 31 C 18 Derived Types Field Values eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeee C 31 C 19 Type Entries by Storage Class eeeeeeeeetetteees C 32 C 20 Auxiliary Symbol Table Entries 0 c eee C 34 C 21 Format for Auxiliary Table Entries c cee C 35 C 22 Tag Name Entries ac cats ay reer eat eesstucteads eter aat vetoes C 36 C 23 Table Entries for End of Structure cece C 36 C 24 Table Entries for Function 2 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 37 XV i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide C 25 Table Entries for Array cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees C 37 C 26 End of Block and Function Entries cee C 38 C 27 Beginning of Block and Function Entries 4 C 38 C 28 Entries for Structures Unions and Enumerations C 39 C 29 Size and Contents of Archive Member Headers C 46 D 1 Initial Bytes of IEEE Elements D 2 D 2 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Representation of High level Types staieirce cent ot dieing en
46. CHECKSUM Preparing for the Bus Confidence Test The syntax for the directive is last check word CHECKSUM expr expr identify the checksum component values Use this directive to obtain the value for the final checksum word to complete the bus confidence test as explained in your processor user s manual Typically you want to load the first few check words with bit patterns that expose possible bus failure symptoms CHECKSUM lets you load the final check word with a value that results in zero when the processor performs an add with carry on all words in the initialization boot record IBR The CHECKSUM directive takes a variable number of arguments depending upon the target processor s requirements You define the values in the directive file for your program i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 34 For example on an i960 CA processor suppose the IBR contains the following word directives _init_boot_record word BYTE_O BUS_CONFIG word BYTE_1 BUS_CONFIG word BYTE_2 BUS_CONFIG word BYTE_3 BUS_CONFIG word _start word _rom_prcb word cwdl word cwd2 word cwd3 word cwd4 word cwd5 word cwd6 In the directive file you define cwd1 through cwd5 then use the CHECKSUM directive to determine the value of cwd as follows cwdl cwd2 cwd3 cwd4 cwd5 cwd6 0xa5a5a5a5 Oxffffffff 0x55555555 0xaaaaaaaa 0x5a5a5a5a checksum _sta
47. EPROM The move command writes the changes to infile CAUTION After the input file has been modified with move the application must contain executable startup code to copy each section that is moved back to its original address as defined in the linker directive file Without such executable startup code the application may execute incorrectly when downloaded since inter section references may no longer be valid ROM Image Builder rom960 Example In the following the first move directive starts the text section at 16383 move hello text 16383 Related Topics Related Topic map mkimage packhex Compresses a hex file by repacking the data records packhex hex file hex file Name of the hex file to repack Discussion This command compresses a hex file by re packing the data records The hex is converted in place This operation should be done before using a split command Example packhex myfile 12 15 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 12 16 patch Overwrites the image contents with that of a new file patch image infile addr image is the executable binary filename infile is the patch filename addr is the patch starting address in the binary file Discussion To overwrite part of an executable binary file with the contents of a patch file use patch Specify the address offset in the binary file where the patch is to start The length of the patch file determi
48. KA target 1nk960 AKA proto o Related Topic 1 Library Input B T Section Start Address Assigns a section starting address Bsection addr bss T datar addr text section is a section name The space between section and addr is required bss identifies the bss section data identifies the data section text identifies the text section addr is a hexadecimal integer constant for T or an octal decimal or hexadecimal expression for B 7 27 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 28 Put no space between T and bss data or text Do not start the bss data or text argument to T with a dot A space between B and the section name is optional Use the full section name including any leading dot Discussion To specify a section starting address use B overriding any other default or directive file section starting address For addr you can use e an octal constant starting with 0 e adecimal constant starting with any digit other than 0 e a hexadecimal constant starting with 0x e an expression that can contain octal decimal and hexadecimal constants and symbols defined in linker directive files or with the defsym option For backward compatibility T is supported with the following restrictions e Specify addr as a hexadecimal constant Expressions are not evaluated Regardless of the leading character or digit T interprets the address as hexadecimal e Use T for only the
49. NOTE The section specification options T and D are processed in the order they appear in the invocation Name Lister gnm960 nam960 To display symbolic information on stdout invoke the name lister for e relocatable object files e non relocatable object files e libraries e library members Unless you specify otherwise the symbols appear in the order encountered With release 6 0 the name lister supports C When listing the names of symbols from object files generated by the C compiler the name lister displays the demangled name The demangling function can be disabled by using the m option when invoking the name lister NOTE Before using the name lister make sure your object file or archive is in host endian byte order To determine byte order use gdmp960 dmp960 described in Chapter 6 To change the byte order use the cof960 objcopy converter described in Chapter 3 Invoke the name lister as nam960 gnm960 option filename nam960 invokes the name lister for backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 Release 3 5 and later gnm960 invokes the name lister for backwards compatibility with GNU 960 Release 2 1 and later 10 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 10 2 option filename is any option listed in Table 10 1 specifies the name s of one or more files separated with spaces whose symbol tables you want the name lister to display If you do not specify a filename
50. N_ABS N_ABS N_ABS N_DEBUG N_ABS N_ DEBUG N_DEBUG N_ DEBUG N_ABS N_ABS N_ABS N_SCNUM N_SCNUM N_ABS N_DEBUG N_DEBUG i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Type Entry The type field in the symbol table entry contains information about the basic and derived type for the symbol The compiler generates this information when the debug option is used Each symbol has one basic or fundamental type but can have more than one derived type The format of the 32 bit type entry is G13 a6 d5 d4 d3 d2 dl type Bit order is from bit 31 on the left to bit 0 on the right Bits 4 through 0 indicated above by type specify one of the fundamental types given in Table C 17 Fundamental types are determined by the user input type Bits 5 through 30 are arranged as thirteen 2 bit fields referred to as d1 through d13 These fields represent levels of the derived types with the values shown in Table C 18 Two examples demonstrate the interpretation of the symbol table entry representing type In the first example the function func returns a pointer to a character char func The fundamental type is 2 character the d1 field is 2 function and the d2 field is 1 pointer Therefore the type word in the symbol table for func contains the hexadecimal number 0xC2 indicating a function that returns a pointer to a character In the second example the tabpt r identifier is a three dimensional array of pointers to short int
51. Part The Section part describes the different sections in the file It describes the combined sections after linkage The format of these records is shown below ST ASS ASL where the section index for the ST ASS or ASL records must match for each group It is not possible to have more than one ASS or ASL record for any section name D 34 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Debug Part In the Debug part there are two types of main groups high level blocks created by a compiler and assembly language blocks created by the assembler The high level blocks contain all compiler symbol information as described In the HP MRI IEEE 695 specification The format for the Debug part is shown below BB1 BB3 BB5 BB10 or BB10 where the first enclosing parenthesis shows a high level group The module names for BB1 BB3 and BB10 must match the filename in the BBS is related to the module name The BB10 block provides backward compatibility The lone BB10 block is the assembly level group It is created when there is no high level information BB1 Block A BB block contains type information for high level symbols it is described earlier in this document The block is formatted as shown below NN TY where any number of types with the same name is allowed The name index must match between the TY record and the last NN record BB3 Block A BB3 block contains the symbolic information for all
52. SECTIONS xxx filename o COMMON The following puts a symbol in the output symbol table for each file that contributes a t xt input section to the utxt output section SECTIONS eater 4 CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS Pe ee If COMMON is not in the linker directive file in a final link uninitialized variables are placed by default into the bss section Allocating the Output Sections gt region ALIGN GROUP You can allocate an output section by explicit addresses alignment memory region name memory attribute When allocating the output sections the linker maintains the default or specified alignment The linker processes the output sections in the following order 1 2 output sections with explicit starting addresses output sections with memory region names or attributes placing each section into the first appropriately configured unallocated region of sufficient size output sections with no location specifications placing each section into the first appropriate unallocated region of sufficient size For information on configuring memory regions see the MEMORY Configuring Memory Regions section i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 16 By default the linker uses the largest alignment of any input section in the output section definition for the entire output section You can specify a larger output section alignment which then overrides the input section
53. User s Guide 8 6 Other Tokens Any character that is neither a part of a name nor part of a quoted string is a token by itself Comments Comments in mpp960 are normally delimited by the characters and newline All characters between the comment delimiters are ignored but the entire comment including the delimiters is passed through to the output Comments cannot be nested so the first newline after a ends the comment The begin comment character can be included in the input by quoting it The comment delimiters can be changed to any string at any time using the built in macro changecom How to Invoke Macros This section describes macro invocation macro arguments and how macro expansion is treated Macro Invocation Macro invocations have one of these forms macroname which is a macro invocation without any arguments or macroname argl arg2 argN which is a macro invocation with n arguments Macros can have any number of arguments All arguments are strings but different macros might interpret the arguments in different ways Macro Processor mpp960 The opening parenthesis must follow the macroname directly with no spaces in between If it does not the macro is called with no arguments at all For a macro call to have no arguments the parentheses must be left out The macro call macroname is a macro call with one empty string argument rather than a call with no arguments Macr
54. a full image and does not skip records with all ones displays help output and exits suppresses generating hex output files Instead dumps the raw binary image to output file image generates images for ROMs that are n bytes long The default is 0x10000 64K writes a map of the binary image to stdout specifies the base name of the output file s When the i option is used the output file contains the binary image Default filename is image When the i option is not used a series of files named namexy hex contain the hex ROM images Default is a series of files named romxy hex sets the checksum start address to n Default is 0x0 prints the version number and continues produces a map as with the m option and summarizes the ROM configuration settings writes grom960 version information to stdout and quits generates ROMs that are n bytes wide the default is 1 grom960 writes n bytes at a time from the binary image to each bank of ROM before moving on to the next ROM bank The combination of the b and w options controls interleaving of ROMs ROM Image Builder grom960 Table 11 2 Section Specifications Section Specification Effect filename addr places the text section of the specified file at address addr relative to the start of the image and places the data section immediately following the text section B filename addr also places both the text and data sections of the specified file at add
55. a macro with two arguments It simply exchanges the order of the two arguments define exch 2 1 gt exch argl arg2 gt arg2 argl This can be used for example if you like the arguments to define to be reversed define exch 2 1 gt define exch expansion text macro gt macro gt expansion text For an explanation of the double quotes see Quoting Macro Arguments mpp960 allows the number following the to consist of one or more digits allowing macros to have any number of arguments 8 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide As a special case argument zero 0 is always the name of the macro being expanded define test Macro name 0 gt test gt Macro name test If you want quoted text to appear as part of the expansion text remember that quotes can be nested in quoted strings Thus in define foo This is macro foo gt foo gt This is macro foo The foo in the expansion text is not expanded since it is a quoted string and not a name Special Arguments to Macros There is a special notation for the number of actual arguments supplied and for all the actual arguments The number of actual arguments in a macro call is denoted by in the expansion text Thus a macro to display the number of arguments given can be define nargs S gt nargs
56. a valid expression or part of a valid expression All macros must be expanded before they are passed to eval If radix is specified it specifies the radix to be used in the expansion The default radix is 10 The result of eval is always taken to be signed The width argument specifies a minimum output width The result is zero padded to extend the expansion to the requested width Note that radix cannot be larger than 36 in the current implementation Any radix larger than 36 is rejected Running Host Commands This section describes the mpp960 macros that let you run host system commands from within mpp960 Executing Simple Commands Use syscmd to execute any shell command syscmd shell commana executes shell command as a shell command The expansion of syscmd is void The expansion is not the output from the command Instead the standard input output and error of the command are the same as those of mpp960 This means that output or error messages from the commands are not read by mpp960 and might get mixed with the normal output from mpp960 8 31 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide producing unexpected results It is therefore a good habit to always redirect the input and output of shell commands used with syscmd Reading the Output of UNIX Commands Use esyscmd if you want mpp960 to read the output of a UNIX command esyscmd shell command This expands to the standard output of the shell command
57. archive file type number ldopen reinitializes LDFILE for the next filename archive file member Use 1dopen and ldclose together The 1dclose function returns FAILURE defined in 1dfcn h only when TYPE ldptr is the archive magic number and the archive contains other members to be processed In such cases call 1dopen with the current value of 1dptr In all other cases especially when a new file is opened call 1dopen with a NULL ldptr argument For example for each file name to be processed ldptr NULL do if ldptr ldopen filename ldptr NULL Check the file type number Process the file while ldclose ldptr FAILURE When oldptr is not NULL ldaopen e opens filename as anew file e allocates and initializes a new LDFILE structure e copies the TYPE OFFSET and HEADER fields from oldptr i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The 1daopen function returns a pointer to the new LDF ILE structure independent of oldptr You can use both pointers concurrently to read separate parts of the object file For example use one pointer to step sequentially through the relocation information and the other to read indexed symbol table entries Both 1dopen and 1daopen open the specified file for reading and return NULL when the file cannot be opened or LDFILE structure memory cannot be allocated A successful open operation does n
58. auxiliary symbol table format The formats are discussed in detail in subsequent sections i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Type of Entry d1 typ DT_NON T_NULL DT_NON T_NULL DT_NON T_NULL DT_NON DT_FCN T_NULL Any except T_MOE Any except T_MOE DT_ARY DT_NON DT_NON DT_NON T_NULL T_NULL T_NULL DT_PTR DT_ARR DT_NON T_STRUCT T_UNION T_ENUM Table C 20 Auxiliary Symbol Table Entries Storage Name Class file C_FILE text data C_STAT bss tagname C_STRTAG C_UNTAG C_ENTAG 20S C_EOS function name C_EXT C_STAT array name C_AUTO C_STAT C_MOS C_MOU C_TPDEF bb C_BLOCK eb C_BLOCK bf ef C_FCN name related C AUTO to structure C_STAT union C_MOS enumeration C_ MOU C_TPDEF Auxiliary Entry Format filename possibly followed by compiler or assembler identification section tag name end of structure function array beginning of block end of block beginning and end of function name related to structure union enumeration A tagname is a symbol name that includes the special symbol xfake The classes fcname and arrname represent any symbol name C 34 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 21 Filenames Filenames can be any length Filenames larger than 14 characters go into the string table Shorter filenames are padded with zeros The ile symbol contains a 0 until the
59. b out into ROM images with text followed immediately by data with even bytes in one bank and odd bytes in another for a ROM with 128 Kbyte capacity grom960 b out b 2 1 0x20000 If the binary image is less than 256 Kbytes there are two output files rom00 hex even bytes and rom01 hex odd bytes Example 2 This example assumes two b out files as input b out contains the text and data for an i1960 CA processor and imi contains the Initial Memory Image data that must appear at location 0xff 00 when the processor powers up Assume that the total binary image is under 64 Kbytes and that the ROM will be installed at address 0xf 0000 grom960 b out imi 0xff00 o ca A single output file named ca00 hex is created Example 3 This example makes the same assumptions as Example 2 but data other than the Initial Memory Image should appear at location 0x8000 in the ROM Oxffff8000 in the runtime address space grom960 T b out D b out 0x8000 imi O0xff00 o ca 11 5 ROM Image Builder rom960 This chapter describes using the rom960 rommer to convert ELF COFF or b out object files to unformatted executable images As shown in Figure 12 1 you can prepare code for a specific target environment The linker generates object files for a downloader rom960 facilitates rearrangement of section descriptions so that the code can be programmed into programmable read only memory PROM devices Figure 12
60. code they must be proceeded by only one underscore While usage of library parameters differs slightly depending on which version of the library you are using all parameters are of type integer and must be positive in value Refer to tables 14 2 and 14 3 for MON960 and IxWorks specific usage respectively MON960 Library Parameters libhs Defsym Default Possible Values Effect _ buck _size 0x40 gt 0 Number of text space bytes per bucket __timer_freq 0x2 Timer interrupt frequency Use one of the following settings Any other setting resets the default 0x1 500 mSec 0x2 1 mSec 0x3 2 mSec 0x4 5 mSec _ prof _start _btext gt _btext and The low address in the range of lt _prof_end instruction addresses to profile _ prof end _etext lt _etext and The high address in the range of gt _prof_start instruction addresses to profile Statistical Profiler ghist960 0x2000 8KB _heap_size Table 14 3 Defsym Default Typical ___buck_size none 0x10 __timer_freq none 0x2710 __prof_start none __prof_end none IxWorks Library Parameters libixhs Possible Values 2 where n gt 3 lt Oxffff gt 0 Must be first symbol in text section Same as MON960 Memory allocated for heap space MON960 Heap space is where the raw profile data is kept for later dumping to the host Default is usually insufficient for profiling To determine the extra heap size you need for profiling use the for
61. command line options needed to add to or override the settings in the linker directive file i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide This chapter focuses on teaching you how to use the linker by providing the following e Some basic information about how the linker allocates memory blocks and sections e A sample linker directive file that you can edit to match the requirements of your target execution environment e Instructions on how to invoke the linker specify your linker directive file object files and other command line options e Sample command lines using additional linker features such as callj calljx link time optimization that you may want to use in your software development e Acomplete reference of all linker command line options Understanding Memory Blocks and Sections With the linker you can specify the portions of 1960 processor s address space are available and where within that space the sections of your program will be located Once you have defined configured memory all other areas in the address space are left unconfigured and are unavailable for linking A section is the smallest relocatable unit of an object file The linker supports COFF b out and ELF object module formats A b out format program contains exactly three standard sections etext is the standard text type section containing instructions and by default starting at address 0 data is the standard data type
62. comments that are delimited by and just as in C A 35 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 36 NOTE You cannot use a hyphen as the first character of a filename In the following example the ifile txt file contains file3 o file4 o Linking occurs in the order filel o file3 0 file4 o file2 o when you enter 1nk960 filel o ifile txt file2 o Example The following is an example linker directive file suitable for use with a fictitious target board See the other linker directive files shipped with the tools located in 1960BASE 1ib 1d and G960BASE 1ib 1d for more examples You can include invocation options at the beginning of the linker directive file for shorter more consistent linker invocations ACA Produce code for an Intel 960 CA processor m Produce a map file N map out Write the map file to the file map out v Produce verbose output You can specify input modules at the beginning of the directive file to be processed as if on the invocation line You can also include in the invocation a separate text file containing only input filenames one per line to be processed as if on the invocation line or at the beginning of the directive file filel o file2 o file3 o Linker Command Language MEMORY ibr o Oxffffff00 1 0x00ff The Intel 80960 CA Initial Boot Record rom o 0xffff8000 1 0x7800
63. conflicts 0x006B reached by a system call 0x006C global leaf procedure can be called with BAL 0x0071 static leaf procedure can be called with BAL Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 13 Storage Classes for Special Symbols Restricted storage classes used only for certain symbols are given in Table C 13 Restricted Storage Classes Storage Class C_BLOCK C_FCN C_EOS C_FILE bf eb ef 0S file Call Optimization Special Symbol bb Call optimization occurs when the linker matches an R_OPTCALL relocation request with a symbol of storage class C_SCALL C_LI C_LEAFEXT When the storage class is C_SCALL the EAFSTAT Or linker replaces the call instruction with a calls instruction to the appropriate system procedure index For the c_LEAE linker replaces the cal1 with a branch and link instruction to a special entry point in the destination procedure EXT Or C_LI EAFSTA storage classes the C_SCALL is the storage class associated with names of routines that can be called with the calls instruction Symbols of type C_SCALL have two auxiliary entries the second of which contains the index of the destination procedure in a table of system calls The C_LE AF EXT storage class is associated with routines that can be called with the branch and link ba1 instruction Such routi
64. date specify o with x extract Example The following example extracts the file o member creating the file o external file with the time and date the file o member was last modified arc960 xo libx a filel o p Print Option Prints archive members Pp Discussion To display the member contents on stdout use p To display all the members specify no member name To display each member name before its contents specify the v verbose modifier Archiver arc960 gar960 Example The following example displays the source1 s member of lib src arc960 pv lib src sourcel s r Replace Option Replaces existing archive members and adds new members Discussion To replace or add a member regardless of the last modification dates use r Existing members specified on the command line are replaced New members specified on the command line are added To replace existing members from all filenames in the current directory specify no member names To designate a location for new members relative to existing members use the after a before b or insert i position modifier To create an archive specify r for an archive that does not exist The following creation message appears arc960 creating archive archive is the name of the archive created You can suppress the creation message with the create c modifier Creating an archive includes creating the new archive symbol table 2 15 i9
65. dcmd ic960 S g t c dumpbase t tmp ica02371 i o t s file t c ic_name_rules gcc2_compiled gnu_compiled_c globl zarr data align 4 rri word word 4 Space 40 text align 4 def _main val _main scl 2 type 0x44 endef globl _main Function main Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 Registers used g0 g4 g5 g6 g7 gl14 fp r4 _main def bf val a sel 101 line in 1 addo 16 sp sp Prologue stats Total Frame Size 16 bytes Local Variable Size 16 bytes Register Save Size 0 regs 0 bytes End Prologue mov g14 r4 def _temp val 64 escl I gt type def in 2 ld _index g4 ld _arr g4 4 g0 callj _func mov g0 g4 mov g4 g5 st g5 64 fp in 3 EPILOGUE ret def ef val ae sel AO line def _main val oop sel def _index val _index ETAN 33 endef bss _index 4 2 def cart val _arr sel 23 sdim 48 type 0x64 endef asm960 t s o t o 0x4 endef type EA endef en endef 0x4 size i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 6 8 dmp960 t o Section text 0O 59084810 addo 16 sp sp 4 5c2016le mov g14 r4 8 90a03000 00000060 ld 0x60 g94 10 90803914 00000030 ld 0x30 g4 4 g0 18 O9ffffe8 call 0x0 1c 5ca01610 mov g0 g4 20 5ca81614 mov g4 g5 24 92afe040 st g5 0x40 fp 28 0a000000 ret Section data 30 03000000 04000000 00000000 00000
66. defsym __prof_end _endapp _prof_start and _prof_end dummy place holder functions may be defined in the same file within the application Code between these dummy place holders will be profiled void _prof_start functions to profile void _prof_end The dummy place holders _prof_start and _prof_end are defined in their own separate files The files are positioned around the files containing functions to profile on gld960 s command line and contain no other code except the dummy place holders profstart c contains void _prof_start profend c contains void _prof_end The files are then linked in the following manner gld960 profstart o profiled objects profend o other objects This is the recommended approach to guarantee that _prof_start is the first symbol located in the text section 14 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide NOTE For libixhis _prof_start must be the first symbol placed in the text section Figure 14 4 shows how an IxWorks DDM object can be profiled DDM objects will be profiled because they are between _prof_start and _prof_end However other objects will not be profiled Figure 14 4 DDM Memory Layout application profstart o _prof_start _prof_start DDM objects _prof_end profend o _prof_end other objects Resource Requirements The library requires the use of one hardware timer and one hardware g
67. e Shows the expansion of each macro call if it is not void f Shows the name of the current input file in each trace output line i Prints a message each time the current input file is changed 1 Shows the current input line number in each trace output line Macro Processor mpp960 efile Idir lnum p Prints a message when a named file is found through the path search mechanism giving the actual filename used q Quotes actual arguments and macro expansions in the display with the current quotes t Traces all macro calls made in this invocation of mpp960 x Adds a unique macro call id to each line of the trace output V Shorthand for all the debug flags Redirects debug and trace output to the named file Error messages are still printed on the standard error output Suppresses all mpp960 extensions that are not supported by the UNIX System V m4 tool Sets the size of the internal hash table for symbol lookup n entries The number should be prime The default is 509 entries Makes mpp960 search dir for included files that are not found in the current working directory Makes this invocation of mpp960 interactive This means that all output is unbuffered and interrupts are ignored Restricts the size of the output generated by macro tracing to num bytes Allows for up to n diversions to be used at the same time The default is 10 diversions Suppresses warnings about missing or superfluous argume
68. endian instructions and data invoke the linker and Specify G to select the big endian search path and libraries as described in the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 Specify Fcoff or Felf for COFF or ELF output Select the 1960 Cx Jx or Hx architecture Linker Ink960 gld960 NOTE Big endian code is supported for COFF or ELF on the i960 Cx Jx and Hx processors only Memory regions must be either all big endian or all little endian The linker emits warnings when you attempt to mix big and little endian code Example The following links with a user defined library abbreviated as myca for a big endian CA target The linker uses the _b or b qualifiers first when searching for the library indicated by 1myca gld960 ACA G Fcoff fcab o fcag o obigca o lcg lm lmyca The objects must have been produced using the assembler s G option gcdm Decision maker Invoke gcdm960 optimization decision maker gcdm Discussion See Chapter 6 gcdm Decision Maker Option in your compiler manual for more information on this option 7 37 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide h Help Displays help information Discussion To display help information for the linker use the h option H Sort common symbols Sorts common symbols based on size Discussion To use the linker to sort common symbols based on size use the H option For each in
69. erased PROM Converting the Image to Hex Files After a single binary image is created it is interleaved according to the ROM width and the number of banks requested If the width is w and the number of banks is b the first w bytes in the image are written to the first bank of ROMs the second w bytes are written to the second bank and so on After the bth bank has been written output resumes at the first bank For example if the number of banks is four the ROM width is two and the first sixteen bytes of the image are 0x00112233445566778899aabbccddeefft then the four banks would begin with the following values bank 0 0x00118899 bank 1 0x2233aabb bank 2 0x4455ccdd bank 3 0x6677eeff Each bank corresponds to at least one ROM Every time the amount of data written to a bank exceeds the specified ROM length a new ROM image file is started Each output file is in Intel hex format and corresponds to a single ROM device The output files are named basenamexy hex where y is the bank number and x is the sequence number within the bank Both x and y are ROM Image Builder grom960 numbered from 0 For example if the number of banks is four the ROM length is 64K and the total image size is 512K then the following hex files would be output bank 0 rom00 hex roml0 hex bank 1 rom01 hex romll hex bank 2 rom02 hex rom1l2 hex bank 3 rom03 hex roml3 hex Example 1 This example converts the executable
70. file e Leaf procedures e System Procedures sysprocs e Common global uninitialized variables e Locals statics in any section typically text data or bss e Globals in any section e Absolutes The linker ignores any other type of symbol when the output OMF is different from the input including e Type Information e g x is a structure containing elements y and z e Line Information e g function x comes from file x c and ranges from lines 123 456 Line 235 is at ip 0x12345678 e Weak Symbols ELF supports a third granularity of symbol type None of the other OMFs supports it 7 14 Linker Ink960 gld960 Some OMFs are not as rich as others and therefore cannot accommodate the features of other OMFs Some examples follow 1 Sections The b out OMF accommodates only text data and bss sections If you create a b out output file and attempt to use the linker to create a section with any other name the linker terminates with an error There is a workaround for this in the normal linker directive language Suppose you have an ELF file called ELF_file o with a section called Other_code_section You can use the following linker directives to include the contents of this section in the text section of the b out output file SECTIONS text lf_file o Other_code_section Also COFF accommodates only sections with names that are up to eight characters long whereas ELF can have arbit
71. information defining the sections of the module A section in this context is a contiguous area of memory It may be absolute or relocatable and may or may not have aname All data minimum address units must be defined in a section For more information on the syntax of records in the Section Part see the HP MRI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics section Section Type ST Each section must have exactly one section type record ASL and ASS records must appear after the ST record they refer to E6 nl 1 Id n2 n3 n4 E6 Record Type nl Section index index must be greater than zero and unique to this module HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format 1 Section type only the new section types are described here AS C1 D3 normal attributes for absolute sections Sections from different modules with these attributes whether they have the same name or not are considered to be unrelated ASP C1 D3 D0 absolute code ASD C1 D3 Cc4 absolute data Section Size ASS The ASS record is required for all sections and defines the size for this section E2 D3 nl n2 E2D3 Record type nl Section index An ST record must have occurred before this ASS record n2 Section size in minimum address units This expression must be a simple number Section Base Address ASL ASL records specify the section base address SE2 CC nl n2 E2cC Record type nl Section ind
72. is in the coff h header file Refer to Example C 3 for the declaration format Example C 3 Relocation Entry Declaration struct reloc long r_vaddr virtual address of reference long r_symndx symbol tableindex into symbol table unsigned short r_type relocation type char padder 2 padding define RELOC struct reloc define RELSZ sizeof RELOC Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Direct Relocation In direct relocation the linker adds the 32 bit address of the requested symbol to the value at a given location In this example the assembler places the value 4 at location x and issues a R_LRELLONG request for fumble At link time linker adds the value of fumble to the word at x glob fumble x word fumble 4 IP relative Relocation In IP relative relocation the linker adds the value of the following expression to the offset in the instruction specified by the relocation entry addr symbol base address of current segment The branch instruction takes a 24 bit IP relative offset In the following example the assembler places the negation of the current location counter in the branch instructions offset field in this example 0xff 0 and issues an r_iprmed relocation request for this branch instruction At link time the linker adds the value of fumble and subtracts the value of tstart from the branch instruction s offs
73. is represented by an individual ATN Examples The following example illustrates how a module miscellaneous record having the classification code 99 chosen for illustration would be documented in this specification and how it would be encoded in the IEEE 695 object module code 99 valuel value2 stringl value3 string2 The miscellaneous record cluster would be represented in this document as follows NN SFO index null_name ATN SF1 SCE index 00 40 63 5 ASN SE2 CE index valuel1 ASN SE2 CE index value2 ATN SF1 SCE index 00 41 stringl ASN E2 SCE index value3 ATN SF1 SCE index 00 41 string2 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format The parameters of the NN and first few ATN and ASN records have the following meanings NN SFO index null name index unique index within the current BB3 block null name 00 i e null name string ATN F1 SCE index n2 n3 n4 n5 index unique index within the current BB3 block the ATN index must match the index of the most recent NN record n2 00 symbol type undefined n3 40 ATN type 64 module miscellaneous information mmisc record n4 63 module miscellaneous information code 99 63 hex 99 decimal n5 05 number of additional ASN ATN records 5 associated with this mmisc cluster ASN SE2 CE index n2 inde
74. linker looks first for architecture specific libraries e g Libcrp a and if those libraries are not found the linker looks for architecture neutral libraries e g libc a Linker Options Reference This section describes the linker command line options in alphabetical order Linker Ink960 gld960 A Architecture Selects libraries identifies instruction set Aarchitecture architecture is SA SB KA KB CA CA_DMA CF JA JD JF JT HA HD HT RD RP RM RN VH COREO CORE1 CORE2 or CORE3 Discussion Specifying the architecture e selects the libraries for your target 1960 processor e identifies the instruction set used in the input object files To specify the architecture use the a option This overrides any OUTPUT_ARCH directive and the 1960ARCH or G960ARCH environment variable Some pairs of A arguments have identical effects e sais the same as KA e SB is the same as KB e cais the same as CF and CA_DMA You can prepare several levels of default values for the architecture and standard libraries Omitting a uses the architecture specified by OUTPUT_ARCH in the linker directive file Omitting both a and OUTPUT_ARCH uses the default architecture for the linker invocation and the architecture environment variables described in the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 e Invoking the linker with 1nk960 uses the 1960ARCH environment variable
75. map directive 12 10 mkfill directive 12 12 mkimage directive 12 12 move directive 12 14 packhex directive 12 15 patch directive 12 16 permute directive 12 17 rom directive 12 18 sh directive 12 21 split directive 12 22 rommer rom960 12 1 S strip linker option 7 50 s Symbol Table archiver option modifier 2 16 section size printer 13 1 options summary 13 2 sh rom960 directive 12 21 siz960 command 13 1 slash character use with tools 1 5 split rom960 directive 12 22 statistical profiler 14 1 buckets 14 3 str960 command 15 1 stripper 15 1 options summary 15 2 T T section start address linker option 7 27 t suppress multiple definition symbol warnings linker option 7 52 t Table of contents archiver option 2 17 T target linker option 7 51 temporary files archiver 2 5 test coverage analysis tool 5 1 controls summary 5 2 5 3 option summary 5 3 5 4 tool names 1 3 tools list of 1 2 Index U u unresolved symbol linker option 7 53 u Update archiver option and modifier 2 18 UNIX command line 1 4 utilities list of 1 2 utility names 1 3 Vv v Verbose archiver option modifier 2 19 v verbose linker option 7 54 V Version archiver option 2 20 V version linker option 7 54 v960 Version archiver option 2 20 v960 version linker option 7 54 W X W warnings linker option 7 55 Windows command line 1 4 X compress linker option
76. member contents 6 14 E e entry point linker option 7 33 ELF b out COFF converter 3 1 options summary 3 2 ELF DWARE sections linker 7 4 environment variables linker 7 20 F f fill linker option 7 35 F format linker option 7 34 F Library Format archiver option 2 11 G G big endian target linker option 7 36 gar960 command 2 1 gcdm decision maker linker option 7 37 gcov960 invocation 5 1 gdmp960 Index archive support 6 11 displaying archive structure 6 12 dumping absolute symbols 6 5 dumping archive member contents 6 14 invocation 6 1 ghist960 overview 14 1 invocation 14 12 gld960 linker invocation 7 6 global uninitialized symbol IEEE 695 4 3 gmung960 command 9 1 gnm960 command 10 1 grom960 11 1 converting image to hex files 11 4 creating binary images 11 4 invocation 11 1 options summary 11 2 section specification 11 2 gsize960 command 13 1 gstrip960 command 15 1 H h Help archiver option 2 11 h help linker option 7 38 H sort common symbols linker option 7 38 HP MRI IEEE 695 object file format D 1 hyphen character use with tools 1 5 l J i Insert archiver option modifier 2 8 IEEE 695 built in types cvt960 4 5 converter warning messages cvt960 4 8 object file format D 1 ihex rom960 directive 12 8 invocation conventions 1 4 J compress linker option 7 39 L 1 library input linker option 7 40 L libra
77. more object files places them in specified locations in a binary image and converts the binary image into one or more files in Intel hex format suitable for submission to a PROM programmer grom960 also provides options that allow bytes from the binary image to be interleaved into multiple banks of PROMs grom960 accepts ELF COFF or b out object file formats as input Invocation The invocation command is grom960 option section_spec option is one of the options listed in Table 11 1 Numeric arguments are interpreted as decimal unless preceded by 0x hex section_spec specifies the placement of a text or data section into the binary image Multiple specifications are allowed they are processed in the order encountered There are four types listed in Table 11 2 11 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 11 1 grom960 Options Option 20 An bn c 16 32 En f h o name Sn v960 wn Effect generates extended address records in 20 bit format e g as used by the 8086 if the ROM is larger than 64K The default is to generate 32 bit format records This option is included primarily for compatibility with old ROM burner software that does not support 32 bit format sets checksum storage address to n Default 0x10000 generates images for n banks of ROMs Default 1 generates a 16 bit or 32 bit CRC checksum sets checksum end address to n Default Oxffff dumps
78. must be the same as specified for the record n2 value for symbol in minimum address units if it is an address Stack relative symbols and register based symbols must not have an ASN record since the value is defined at execution time HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D Compiler Id This section is applicable if the assembler recognizes the ic960 compiler s ident directive Compiler Id Codes directly follow the BB3 record A dummy NN record precedes the initial ATN record in order to produce a symbol name index One ATN record defines that this is a module miscellaneous directive It is followed by three ASN records for tool code type checking code and default pointer size in minimum address units These are optionally followed by one ATN for the version number and up to six ASNs for the date and time F1 SCE nl 0 64 50 n5 ASN1 0 4 ATN1 ASN4 ASN5 ASN6 ASN7 ASN8 ASN9 F1cCE ATN Record type nl Symbol name index produced by an NN record 0 Symbol type index 64 Attribute definition of 64 for module misc 50 Module misc type identification number of 50 ATN record n5 Miscellaneous record count based on number of date values etc ASN1 Tool code definition The tool code is either 208 for the ic960 compiler or 210 for the cvt960 converter ASN2 Type code 0 Transparent type checking structural type equivalence 4 Default pointer size for module in minimum address units A
79. needed Thus miscellaneous records allow the IEEE 695 object module format to evolve in an orderly manner as new debugging features and requirements emerge One of the main advantages of miscellaneous records is that in general they are processed in a generic content independent manner by intermediate language system tools such as assemblers and linkers That is assemblers and linkers need not interpret or manipulate in any special way the contents of miscellaneous records except to resolve in the standard manner the values of relocatable expressions that may be present in these records As a result there is no need to modify assemblers or linkers when new classes of miscellaneous information are defined Three classes of miscellaneous records have been defined module miscellaneous records for augmenting the debugging information for program modules procedure miscellaneous records for decorating code blocks and variable miscellaneous records for decorating data objects The three kinds of miscellaneous records differ primarily with regard to the scope within which the record s information applies The affiliation of a miscellaneous record with the object or objects it describes is determined primarily by the relative position within the object file of the miscellaneous record and the object or objects it describes These positional relationships are explained in more detail below D 37 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Gu
80. no output This is a common mpp960 idiom for introducing a block comment as an alternative to repeatedly using dn1 This special usage is recognized so that in this case the warning about missing arguments is never triggered If called with three or four arguments ifelse expands into equal if string 1 and string 2 are equal character for character otherwise it expands to not equal ifelse foo bar true gt ifelse foo foo true gt true ifelse foo bar true false gt false ifelse foo foo true false gt true However ifelse can take more than four arguments If given more than four arguments ifelse works like a case or switch statement in traditional programming languages If st ring 1 and string 2 are equal ifelse expands into equal otherwise the procedure discards the first three arguments discarded and repeats For example ifelse foo bar third gnu gnats sixth seventh gt seventh A common use of ifelse is in macros implementing loops of various kinds i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Loops and Recursion There is no direct support for loops in mpp960 but macros can be recursive There is no limit on the number of recursion levels other than those enforced by your hardware and operating system Loops can be programmed using recursion and the conditionals described previously The built in macro shift can iterate
81. not given xlate960 replaces an extension of s or as with xlt or appends xlt to any other filename Displays version information and continues processing Displays version information and exits Displays translation compatibility warnings to the screen matching those inserted in the output file Emits warnings instead of errors for unrecognized instructions Invocation Through the Assembler The translation utility can also be invoked through the assemblers gas960e gas960c gas960 or asm960 by using the assembler t option When invoked in this manner xlate960 uses the assembler s architecture specification A option as its output target architecture If errors occur during the translation process the assembler does not attempt to process the xlate960 output file This includes instances where the translator output file requires manual adjustments 16 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 16 4 Invocation Examples The following command converts instructions in myfile s to 80960Rx compliant instructions placing the output into the file myfile xlt xlate960 myfile s The next example shows how to run xlate960 from the assembler command line generating an 80960Rx compliant object file myfile o gas960e myfile s t ACOREO Output File Format The output file produced by xlate960 is identical to the input file except for the instances where translation occurred Each instruction that was
82. o Linker Ink960 gld960 f Fill Sets the fill value for unused memory in an output section fvalue value is a two byte hexadecimal constant in C style notation Discussion Use this options to initialize blocks of memory in sections of an output file You can prepare several levels of default fill values e A FILL directive inside a section valid only for parts of the section defined after FILL is encountered definition is used first e With no fill value inside a section definition the linker uses the FILL directive at the end of the current section definition inside the SECTIONS directive e With no fill value defined in the directive file the linker uses the f option e With both f and FILL omitted the linker uses a 0 fill value Filler is used to ensure alignments between input sections a s b s text 0 align 4 align 4 lda 0 g0 lda 0 90 lda 0 g0 Filler 1nk960 a o b o lda 0 g0 7 35 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Example The following command links filel o file2 o0 and file3 o to produce an executable image named a out The linker places OxFFFF in all gaps between the input sections in the output file 1nk960 f OxFFFF filel o file2 o file3 0o file o xxx ld S ECTIONS one first o text 0x1000 filler second o text G Big endian Target Produces a COFF or ELF file for a big endian target Discussion To link big
83. occurs when symindex is greater than the number of symbols in the object file or when 1dtbread cannot read the symbol table entry Finding Information in Object Files idtbseek Seeks to the symbol table include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldtbseek ldptr LDFILE ldptr Discussion The 1dtbseek function seeks to the symbol table of the object file associated with ldptr The 1dtbseek function returns SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h The 1dtbseek function fails when the symbol table has been stripped from the object file or when the function cannot seek to the symbol table Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF This chapter describes the i960 processor common object file format COFF and the associated common archive file format CAFF standards Characteristics of COFF COFF applies to two kinds of files relocatable binary files and executable files Relocatable binary files are produced by the assembler and by some linker options Executable files are created from relocatable binary files by the linker Figure C 1 shows the relation of headers to the information in COFF NOTE The only optional header the assembler uses is the execution header When you link a program with the linker s strip option relocation information line numbers the symbol table and the string table are deleted Or you can remove line number information the sym
84. path For more information on your host system compiler see your host system documentation For more information on the h header files and directories see the 1960 Processor Library Supplement The COFL includes the functions listed in Table B 1 Common Object File Library COFL Functions Function Definition Idaclose Closes the object file or archive Idahread Reads an archive member header Idaopen Opens the object file or archive for reading Idclose Closes the object file or archive member Idfhread Reads the file header Idgetname Retrieves a name from the object file symbol table Idlinit Prepares the object file for reading line number entries via Idlitem continued amp B 2 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table B 1 Common Object File Library COFL Functions continued Function Idlitem Idlread Idlseek Idniseek Idnrseek Idnshread Idnsseek Idohseek Idopen Idrseek Idshread Idsseek Idtbindex Idtbread Idtbseek Definition Reads the line number entry from the object file after Idlinit Reads the line number entry from the object file Seeks to the line number entries Seeks to the line number entries given the section name Seeks to the relocation entries given the section name Reads the section header given the section name Seeks to the section given the section name Seeks to the optional file header Opens the object file or archive member for reading Seeks to t
85. pf and default ol1d created after running the instrumented program compare c gcov960 rlm n default pf p default old Z pdb e produces file compare cov containing the output shown below include lt stdio h gt main argc argv int argc char argv int nl n2 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 5 8 if argc nl ato n2 ato if nl if nl else Het HH gt if nl Fett t HH gt else Lines Just Missed No of Blocks Blocks Hit Blocks Missed Source Coverage Program database Program profile Other program file he lt 3 printf Usage compare nl n2 n exit 0 i argv 1 i argv 2 lt 0 n2 lt 0 printf Use integers larger than zero n exit 0 n2 printf n sd equals d n nl n2 lt n2 printf n sd is less than d n nl printf nsd is greater than d n 2 13 9 4 69 23 ffs a elvis tmp pdb ffs a elvis tmp default old ffs a elvis tmp default pf n2 nl n2 Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 The dumper disassembler displays object or archive library files in COFF ELF and b out formats It displays object file contents including e file section and COFF optional headers e line number entries e relocation entries e symbol and string tables e contents of the sections as assembly language e contents of the sections as hexadecimal bytes in little endi
86. removes all non allocated sections debug sections By default all information remains in the output file Since relocation requires the symbol table using s with the relocation option r terminates the linker with an error Linker Ink960 gld960 Related Topics x X Compress r Relocate T Target Searches for the linker directive file in the linker search path Tfilename filename is the linker directive filename You need not specify a 1d extension Discussion To find a linker directive file in a directory other than the current one specify the file with T Providing the directive filename without T limits the linker to searching in the current directory The linker searches for both filename and filename 1d With T the linker searches for the directive file along the search path described in the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 The T option has the same effect as a TARGET directive For information on the linker command language used in linker directive files see Appendix A 7 51 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 52 1 NOTE You must add the 1a extension when specifying any directive filenames that are the same as the standard section names text ld use Ttext ld data ld use Tdata ld bss ld use Tbss ld You cannot use the T option to find a directive file named text data or bss You can use the names text ld data 1d
87. replacement is supplied regexp changes the expansion to this argument with substituted by string and n substituted by the text matched by the Nth parenthesized sub expression of regexp 0 being the text the entire regular expression matched regexp GNUS not UNIX w wt O NI gt UNIX nix 8 27 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 8 28 Extracting Substrings Use substr to extract substrings substr string from length expands to the substring of st ring which starts at index from and extends for length characters or to the end of string if length is omitted The starting index of a string is always 0 Translating Characters Character translation is done with translit translit string chars replacement expands to st ring with each character that occurs in chars translated into the character from replacement with the same index If replacement is shorter than chars the excess characters are deleted from the expansion If replacement is omitted all characters in st ring that are present in chars are deleted from the expansion Both chars and replacement can contain character ranges such as a z meaning all lowercase letters or 0 9 meaning all digits To include a dash in chars or replacement place it first or last It is not an error for the last character in the range to be larger than the first In that case the range runs backwards 9 0 ind
88. rommer directives e Start rommer directive lines with in columns 1 and 2 putting no space between the and the rommer directive e Separate the rommer directives from the rest of the linker directive file with and The linker processes no lines between the and You can write directive files for use with different sets of input Use the parameters 0 through 9 in a directive file to accept arguments sequentially from the rommer invocation For example the following uses the rom 1a directive file first to build mypgm r from mypgm o then to build pgm2 r from pgm2 o rom960 rom ldmypgm o mypgm s First invocation rom960 rom ldpgm2 0o pgm2 s Second invocation Here is a sample linker directive file that produces a ROM image _intr stack 0x00040000 ram_ 0x30000000 MEMORY rom o 0x00000000 1 0x40000 ram o 0x301f 0000 1 0x40000 SECTIONS text gt rom data gt ram oss gt ram move 0 mkimage 0 1 split 1 65536 16 65536 8 1 ihex 1 00 1 eve ihex 1 01 Sl odd ae The linker processes the assignment statements and the MEMORY and SECTIONS directives 12 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The rommer directives appear between the and characters and each rommer directive line starts with note that only section headers are changed no relocation is performed move places the data section immediately after
89. specified again on the command line or in a linker directive file or if the c is used You can use the u option to create an unresolved reference to a symbol in the desired library member before specifying the library NOTE Because the linker processes libraries and files in order the appearance order of the 1 option on the command line is significant For example g1d960 f o 1h differs from g1d960 1h f o and g1d960 1h 1c differs from g1d960 lc 1h Linker Ink960 gld960 Examples In the following example e Input file1 o refers to the ABc symbol defined in member 0 of libckb a e Input file2 o refers to the xyz symbol defined in member 0 of liba a e Both input files refer to the Fcn external function defined in member 1 of both libraries The command line is 1nk960 filel o la file2 o lc The Fcn references are satisfied by liba a member 1 ABC is obtained from libckb a member 0 and xyz remains undefined since the library liba a is searched before file2 o is specified To repair this consider changing the command line to 1nk960 filel o u_XYZ la file2 o lc You can create an unresolved reference from the command line with the u option Such references link archive members needed to resolve the undefined symbol even when the input does not explicitly reference the symbol The following command creates an undefined symbol called rout 1 in the global symbol table 1nk960 u routl file
90. text data and bss sections Examples e The following starts data at the address 1000 hexadecimal and starts the section named mydata at the address 24 hexadecimal 1nk960 Tdata 0x1000 Bmydata 0x24 filel o file2 o e When B and T locate the same section name B overrides T The following starts text at Oxc 1nk960 Ttext Oxf0 filel o file2 o B text Oxc e The starting address of sect 1 in the following command can be expressed as 012750 octal 5608 decimal or 0x15e8 hexadecimal 1nk960 Bsect1 0x1000 1000 01000 filel o file2 o Linker Ink960 gld960 C Startup Alternative Suppresses any STARTUP directive in the linker directive file Discussion By default the first object file or library specified on the command line is linked first To link a different file first use c The c option overrides the STARTUP directive and returns to the default Example For example the my targ 1d file contains a STARTUP crtest o directive The following links newstart o first instead of crtest o 1nk960 C Tmy targ newstart o filel o c Circular Library Search Searches libraries circularly Discussion By default the linker processes libraries in order reading from left to right on the command line In most cases this approach works well Occasionally however libraries contain circular references In such cases you can use the linker s c option to search libraries iteratively to resolve these ref
91. text and or data at an address other than where it was linked For example some code must copy its data from ROM to RAM before execution In this case the data is linked at the RAM address but it must be loaded at the ROM address from which it will be copied The file s data load address corresponds to the RAM address at link time After link time you can modify the data load address to correspond to the ROM address This lets the ROM burner or loader know the correct address to place the section s contents Invoke the munger as gmung960 option file option is one of the options listed in Table 9 1 file identifies the object file to be munged It must be a linked executable file i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 9 2 Table 9 1 gmung960 Options Option Effect D add Changes the load address of the file s data section to addr addr h T addr v960 is interpreted as a decimal unless preceded by Ox hex indicator If addr is omitted the load address is the first available address following a previously specified address gives a help message changes the load address of file s text section to addr addris interpreted as a decimal number unless preceded by Ox hex indicator If addr is omitted the load address is either zero or the first available address following a previously specified address writes gmung960 version information to stdout and exits without doing anything
92. the image The image starts with the lowest address text type or data type section and ends after the highest address such section Examples The following translates the file he11o to the binary image romhello mkimage hello romhello The following translates only the three input sections from the file mkimage file file image text textl foo The following uses a mkimage command after a rom command specifying the target ROM configuration mkimage hello romhello rom 32767 16 2 Related Topic move 12 13 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 12 14 Rearranges the sections move infile section phys addr after section infile is the input filename section is a linked section name phys addr is the new memory section physical address Discussion This command is used to reorder file sections for programming move changes the address of section in the object file to the specified physical address phys addr If section is not specified the rommer arranges sections with data immediately after text When specifying section the physical address may be in hex or you may use the keyword after followed by a section name For example move myfile bigblock after data The move directive changes only the header information in infile without relocating any symbols Use move to prepare a file for the mkimage directive or for example to change the physical address for a particular
93. the B and T section start address options in Chapter 7 section defs is one or more output section definitions mem spec specifies a memory region by name or attributes The gt is required NOTES Specify the address or memory region for a group the same as for a section Specify no such locations for the individual sections within a group An output section or group that does not fit at the specified address causes an error Although the GROUP directive should keep the sections in the order specified empty sections that contain no external symbols and are not user defined e g data text bss do not always appear in the specified order This behavior can be avoided by declaring an external symbol in the empty section Although the linker does not ensure that the sections are an even number of bytes in length you need not align the individual input sections within an aligned output section The assembler and compiler create sections that are multiples of four bytes in length Examples 1 The following aligns the out sec output section on an address that is a multiple of 0x20000 address 0x0 0x20000 0x40000 etc SECTIONS outsec ALIGN 0x20000 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The following assigns text the starting address 0x040000000 data the first available address in mem1 and bss the first memory location big enough hold it MEMORY meml o 0x10000000 1 0x20000 mem2
94. to reflect the current contents of the archive The symbol table is transparent to the user and inaccessible to a user of the archiver It is implemented as a member of the archive with a standard archive header The symbol table has a name of zero length that is ar_name 0 0 0 means NULL the string terminator The ar_date field in the symbol table header reflects the date of the archive s creation Figure C 6 illustrates an archive symbol table The symbol table consists of the following fields e Total number of symbols in the archive 1 word e Array of offsets to member headers 1 word per symbol e String table of null terminated external symbols 1 string per symbol The symbol table enables the linker to make a more efficient pass over object libraries C 47 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Figure C 6 The Archive Symbol Table Symbol Table Header s merber 0 header with zero length name Number of Symbols in Archive Offsets to Members one per symbol gt member 0 test Name String Table one per symbol n pad to even byte member 0 padding if necessary OSD318 C 48 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format This chapter describes the Microtec Research Inc Hewlett Packard Company version of IEEE 695 object module format supporting assemblers compilers linkers and debuggers The material for this chapter is taken from the HP M
95. translation warnings indicate more subtle incompatibilities those that are less likely to affect the compatibility of the output code An example of this would be a translated code sequence that does not maintain the same faulting behavior as the original code When the translation utility determines that such a condition exists it emits a warning into the output file of the format xlate warn Warning message 16 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 16 6 You can display warning messages on the screen using the w switch You should also examine translation warnings before continuing with code migration Known Limitations xlate960 is unable to translate dot relative expressions in some instances For example given the following code fragment bge 12 lda 10 r4 g5 4 g10 mov r5 r6 The original intent is that the 1da instruction is skipped when the AC register condition code indicates a greater than or equal to condition Because of the line by line nature of the translator however this code is translated into the following bge 12 shlo 2 95 gl0 addo g10 r4 g10 lda 10 g10 g10 mov r5 r6 Notice that the bge instruction branches into the middle of the translation routine instead of branching around it These conditions can be avoided by using good programming practices such as creating a label for the target of the bge instruction in the above instance Linker Command Language In
96. type 0 unspecified Offset in minimum address units The offset is the absolute address of the beginning of the code block D 23 D 24 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide If the function name does not exist length 0 this is an unnamed block used for variable scoping only Block Type 10 assembler module scope beginning SF8 SOA 0 Id Id n2 Id n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8 1 SF8 SOA 0 Id Id n2 Id n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 ng Record type Block Type 10 assembler module scope beginning Block size in bytes 0 unknown Name of the source file COFF file symbol Zero length string Tool type if a global_non_init module this field contains 210 tool code for the cvt960 Otherwise if the assembler outputs an asmid this field contains 209 tool code for the asm960 or if there is no asmid there is no n2 Version and revision in string format if n2 is 210 the version and revision of cvt960 is given if n2 is 209 the version and revision of asm960 is given If there is no n2 there is no Id Year e g 1988 if produced by COFF Month 1 12 Gf produced by COFF Day 1 31 if produced by COFF Hour 0 23 if produced by COFF Minute 0 59 if produced by COFF Second 0 59 if produced by COFF The first Id field in the BB10 record holds the value of the i1e symbol from COFF either a c filename or an asm filename Block Type 11 module section SF8 0B 0 Id
97. when the routine is entered by _second and by a bal or balx instruction For more information on the cal1j and call4jx pseudo instructions see the 1960 Processor Assembler User s Guide Linker Ink960 gld960 Using calljx with the i960 Rx Processor When using a call jx pseudo instruction with the ARP or ARD option calljx uses a different syntax For example inserting a calljx instruction while using the agD setting might produce the following linker output depending upon whether the target is a default call leaf procedure or system call Default Call Leaf Procedure System Call callx _target balx _target g14 lda _sysprocIndex g13 calls g13 When using a calljx with the new ARP or ARD option calljx uses the syntax calljx _target tmpreg where tmpreg is a local or global register This change results in the following sequences in the linker Default Call Leaf Procedure System Call lda _target tmpreg lda _target tmpreg lda _sysprocIndex g13 callx tmpreg balx tmpreg g14 calls g13 Notice that with the 80960Rx call jx format all three call types result in a three word instruction sequence whereas with other architectures the previous call 4x format requires only two words Binding Profile Counters to Non standard Sections When compiling for two pass compilation the compiler places profile counters in your code These are COMMON variables but are allocated jointly therefore all profile counters occup
98. 0 Id SF8 Record type 01 Block Type 1 unique typedefs for module 0 Block size in bytes 0 unknown Id Module name from COFF file symbol Block Type 3 high level module scope beginning SF8 03 0 Id SF8 Record type 03 Block Type 3 high level module scope beginning HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format 0 Id Block size in bytes 0 unknown Module name must be the same name as specified for BB1 Block Type 4 global function SF8 04 0 Id 0 n3 n4 SF8 04 0 Id 0 n3 n4 Record type Block Type 4 global function Block size in bytes 0 unknown Function name Number of bytes of stack space required for local variables in minimum address units 0 unknown Type index for return value parameter and function information x type 0 unknown The absolute address of the beginning of the code block Block Type 5 filename for source line numbers SF8 05 0 Id SF8 05 0 Id Record type Block Type 5 filename for source line numbers Block size in bytes 0 unknown Source filename Block Type 6 local function SF8 06 0 Id n2 n3 n4 SF8 06 0 Id n2 n3 n4 Record type Block Type 6 local function static Block size in bytes 0 unknown Function name Number of bytes of stack space required for local variables in minimum address units Type index for return value parameter and function information Cx
99. 0 u libname a elf_omf_file o the archiver creates a new library in ELF format When you use the F option to specify a library format and try to add an object file in a different format the archiver uses the format of the object file For example gar960 Felf u libname a coff_omf_file o Archiver arc960 gar960 creates a new library in COFF format Once a library is created all object files within must be of the same format For example trying to add an ELF format object file to a COFF format archive produces an error message Temporary Directory on page 2 4 Example The following example replaces file1 o and file2 o in libx a using the current directory for temporary files arc960 rl libx a filel o file2 o m Move Option Repositions archive members Discussion To reposition members within the archive use m To move members relative to another member specify the after a before b or insert i modifier Omitting the position modifier moves the members to the end of the archive Example The following example places file1 o at the end of libx a arc960 m libx a filel o 2 13 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 14 o Output Date Modifier Extracts a member using the last modified date Discussion When extracting a member to a file the archiver uses the current time and date as the file creation time stamp To use the member last modification time and
100. 0 implements the following command line options v d 1 o N and t For a description of these options see the Invoking mpp960 section Also the debugging and tracing facilities in mpp960 are much more extensive than in most other versions of m4 8 35 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Facilities in UNIX System V m4 not in mpp960 There are a few incompatibilities between mpp960 and the UNIX System V m4 tool UNIX System V m4 supports multiple arguments to defn This is not implemented in mpp960 When text is being diverted mpp960 implements sync lines differently from UNIX System V m4 mpp960 outputs the sync lines when the text is being diverted and UNIX System V m4 outputs it when the diverted text is being brought back The problem is determining which lines and filenames should be attached to text that is being or has been diverted UNIX System V m4 regards all the diverted text as being generated by the source line containing the undivert call whereas mpp960 regards the diverted text as being generated at the time it is diverted Invoking mpp960 without the c option defines the macro __gnu__ to expand to the empty string On UNIX systems mpp960 without the c option defines the macro __unix__ otherwise the macro unix Both expand to the empty string Munger gmung960 The gmung960 utility modifies text section and or data section memory load addresses in an object file Use gmung960 to load
101. 000 40 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 50 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Here is the same example but with symbolic disassembly enabled Note how much more closely the disassembly resembles the assembly source code dmp960 s t o Section text _main 0 59084810 addo 16 sp sp 4 5c2016le mov g14 r4 8 90a03000 00000054 ld _index g4 10 90803914 00000024 ld _arr g4 4 g0 18 O9ffffe8 call _func es 9287e040 st g0 0x40 fp 20 0a000000 ret Section data 24 03000000 04000000 00000000 00000000 34 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 44 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 Index Index Index Index Index Index Index 12 LT 18 Here are the relocations that are passed to the linker dmp960 r t o x x RELOCATION INFORMATION Section text Vaddr Type Name 0x0000000c RELLONG bss 0x00000014 RELLONG data 0x00000018 IPRMED_func 0x00000018 OPTCALL_func Section data Section bss And here is part of the COFF symbol table Note the use of the n option to make the dumper display only symbols from the bss section dmp960 t o t n bss SYMBOL TABLE INFORMATION ml Name Offset Valu Scnum Flags Type Sclass Numaux Name a0 Word1 Shortl Short2 Short3 Short4 Short5 Short6 Tv al Fname a2 Tagndx Fsize Lnnoptr Endndx Tvndx a3 Scnlen Nreloc Nlinno a4 Tagndx Lnno Size
102. 1 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities Utility Names archiver arc960 gar960 converters cof960 objcopy cvt960 coverage gcov960 analyzer dumper dmp960 disassembler gdmp960 linker gld960 Ink960 macro mpp960 processor munger gmung960 name lister gnm960 nam960 ROM image rom960 builders grom960 section size size960 printer gsize960 statistical ghist960 profiler stripper gstrip960 str960 Assembly xlate960 Language Converter Function creates and maintains libraries and archives reorder bytes as big endian or little endian and convert between b out format COFF ELF and IEEE 695 format facilitates testing of i960 processor software applications disassembles and displays object and archive file contents combines object files into executable or relocatable files creates and interprets macros modifies text section and or data section load address es in an object file prints object file and library symbol table information create a memory image file from an object file displays section and file sizes of object files and libraries generates information about application s runtime behavior removes symbolic information from an object file converts assembly language code from 80960 core processors e g i960 Cx Jx and Hx processors to its COREO e g 80960Rx equivalent See Ch 2 Ch 3 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8 Ch 9 Ch 10 Ch 11 12 Ch
103. 1 rom960 Rommer Operations Rearrange Create Absolute C PROM Convert to A ROM able an Memory Image Jam L Loadable code move mkimage F Code Executable Code Debug and Run gdb960 A0021 01 eps 12 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 12 2 Figure 12 2 To place code in ROM code sections must be located at the PROM device addresses Translating a formatted object file into an unformatted executable image may include any of the following steps e re ordering the bits to match machine requirements e organizing the images to fit the target ROMs e calculating a checksum and incorporating it in the image e outputing the image in Intel hexadecimal format for a PROM programming device Figure 12 2 shows an example of the rommer translation of a COFF file Data Placement in Memory Image eee Memory Image Headers Raw Data 1 7i ee Raw Data 2 ie ee Raw Data 3 OS ae i a Data ae _ eee oF See OSD1702 ROM Image Builder rom960 Rommer Invocation Use this syntax to invoke the rommer rom960 option dfile arglist where option is any of the following h displays help y displays the version number and copyright date v960 displays version information and exits dfile specifies a rommer directive file named dfile 1d arglist is up to 10 directive file arguments separated by spaces NOTE You must either specify adfile i
104. 5 Object Module Format OMF compatibilities 7 14 options reference 7 24 output file naming 7 13 p position independence option 7 47 P profiling option 7 46 R read symbols only option 7 48 r relocation option 7 49 S strip option 7 50 T section start address option 7 27 t suppress multiple definition symbol warnings option 7 52 T target option 7 51 u unresolved symbol option 7 53 v verbose option 7 54 V version option 7 54 v960 version option 7 54 W warnings option 7 55 X compress option 7 55 y trace symbol option 7 56 Z program database option 7 57 z time stamp suppression option 7 57 linker command language 7 51 assignments A 2 expressions and operators A 2 introduction A 1 linker directive files A 35 command language A 1 described 7 4 sample 7 5 specifying 7 12 linker directives ADDR A 25 ALIGN A 25 CHECKSUM A 33 DEFINED A 25 ENTRY A 28 FLOAT A 31 FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION A 25 HLL A 29 INCLUDE A 32 MEMORY A 5 linker directives continued NEXT A 25 OUTPUT A 34 Index PRE_HLL A 28 SEARCH_DIR A 32 SECTIONS A 8 SIZEOF A 27 STARTUP A 27 SYSLIB A 31 TARGET A 33 linker options summary 7 7 linking incremental 7 13 Ink960 linker invocation 7 6 m memory map linker option 7 42 m Move archiver option 2 13 M multiple definition warning linker option 7 42 macro processor 8 1 controlling input
105. 6 Statistical Profiler ghist960 Timer Frequency __timer_freq Sampling is achieved by using a hardware timer Depending on the hardware configuration the timer used may either be the 1960 processor s TIMER or an off chip peripheral The usage of __timer_freq depends on which library you are using With libhs the only valid values are 0x1 0x4 With libixhs the value of __timer_freq is the number of times to sample in one second The range of valid __timer_freq values is given by 6 0 lt busClkMhz 10 __ timer _ freq Where busClkMhz is the speed of the CPU clock in megahertz lt ffff FEFE e NOTE Profiling requires complete control of the target board s timer If the program being profiled uses the timer the profile data is incorrect or misleading You must disable all timer accesses Profiling region __prof_start and __prof_end Most often the entire program will be profiled It is also possible to select a region for profiling by modifying __prof_start and __prof_end Code that does not reside within the bounds of __prof_start and __prof_end will not be profiled When developing for the MON960 environment libhs the low level library libll defines _prof_start and _prof_end to _btext and _etext respectively In contrast when developing for IxWorks _prof_start and _prof_end must be set explicitly Furthermore libixhs places special restrictions on __prof_start which are described here in deta
106. 60 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 16 Examples 1 The following example adds file1 o before file2 0in libx a arc960 rb file2 o libx a filel o 2 The following example archives all o files in the current working directory by adding to or replacing members in libx a The verbose v option displays messages on the terminal screen indicating whether members are added a or replaced r arc960 rv libx a o hello o POTOLO prog_84a o str_b o str_eg2 o str_eg3 o0 str_eg4 o oo ov M9 RK KH s Symbol Table Option and modifier Rebuilds the archive symbol table Discussion To rebuild the symbol table use s You need not specify s with the d r or u option since the archiver updates the symbol table automatically The s option has no effect on text archives Archiver arc960 gar960 Example The following example rebuilds the symbol table of libo a arc960 s libo a t Table of Contents Option Lists the member names u Updat t names Discussion To list all the members in an archive or to list specified members use t The names argument lists the members for which you want information To print a table of contents for all members omit names The information about specified members appears on stdout To list the names permissions sizes dates and times of the specified members specify the verbose v option Otherwise the archiver
107. 8 19 debugging macros 8 16 diverting output 8 23 including files 8 22 processor options 8 2 map rom960 directive 12 10 mkfill 12 12 mkimage rom960 directive 12 12 move rom960 directive 12 14 mpp960 command 8 2 message prefixes 8 1 munger 9 1 options summary 9 2 N N name memory map file linker option 7 43 n noinhibit output linker option 7 44 nam960 command 10 1 name lister 10 1 options summary 10 3 namer tool 10 1 names of utilities 1 3 0 O optimization of calls inhibited linker option 7 44 o Output date archiver option modifier 2 14 o output filename linker option 7 45 objcopy command 3 2 object converter 3 1 options summary 3 2 object file conversion tools 3 1 12 1 Object Module Format OMF archives 2 4 compatibilities 7 14 optimization link time 7 16 output files linker naming 7 13 Index 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide P p position independence linker option 7 47 p Print archiver option 2 14 P profiling linker option 7 46 packhex rom960 directive 12 15 patch rom960 directive 12 16 permute rom960 directive 12 17 profile p option gcov960 5 3 5 4 Q R R read symbols only linker option 7 48 r relocation linker option 7 49 r Replace archiver option 2 15 rom rom960 directive 12 18 rom960 checksum directive 12 7 directives summary 12 4 ihex directive 12 8 invocation 12 1 12 3
108. 960 4 5 COFF to IEEE 695 converter 4 1 options summary 4 2 Common Object File Library COFL B 1 compatibility of mpp960 8 1 conversion tools for object files 3 1 12 1 converter 3 2 Index 1 Index 2 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide output file 3 3 coverage analyzer 5 1 controls summary 5 2 5 3 option summary 5 3 5 4 CTOOLS 5 1 compatibility 1 3 cvt960 invocation 4 1 cvt960 object converter 4 1 archives and relocatable objects 4 3 COFF line numbers 4 4 compilation assembly information 4 4 global uninitialized symbols 4 3 IEEE 695 built in types 4 5 IEEE 695 converter warning messages 4 8 Position independent code data and symbols 4 3 unreferenced types 4 3 D d define common symbol space linker option 7 31 d Delete archiver option 2 10 D inhibit CAVE section compression linker option 7 31 debugging macros 8 16 8 19 defsym define a symbol linker option 7 32 Displaying archive structure 6 12 dmp960 archive support 6 11 displaying archive structure 6 12 dumping absolute symbols 6 5 dumping archive member contents 6 14 examples 6 6 section headers 6 11 symbol tables 6 9 with symbolic disassembly 6 8 dmp960 gdmp960 options summary 6 2 thru 6 4 dmp960 invocation 6 1 dumper archive support 6 11 displaying archive structure 6 12 options summary 6 2 6 3 dumper disassembler 6 1 dumping absolute symbols 6 5 dumping archive
109. 960 input and output Output from mpp960 is prefixed by the string gt For example gt Output line from mpp960 Error messages are prefixed by the string error gt error gt and an error message mpp960 s predefined macros are described by a prototype call of the macro using descriptive names as arguments regexp string regexp replacement All mpp960 macro arguments are strings but some strings are interpreted as numbers filenames or regular expressions 8 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 8 2 The characters around the third argument shows that this argument is optional when it is left out it is taken to be the empty string An ellipsis last in the argument list means that any number of arguments can follow Invoking mpp960 The format of the mpp960 command is mpp960 option macro definition input file where option is any of the following Dname Enters name into the symbol table before any input files are read When value is missing the value is taken to be the empty string The value can be any string and the macro can be defined to take arguments just as if defined from within the input dflags Sets the debug level according to the flags The debug level controls the format and amount of information presented by the debugging functions a Shows the actual arguments in each macro call c Shows several trace lines for each macro call
110. Assume a bank of ROM exists at this address ram o O0xe0f 9000 1 0x6000 Assume some RAM exists at this address SECTIONS We allocate the ibr to ibr memory Assume the code for the ibr is in the input section text in the file named ca_ibr o ibr ca_ibr o text gt ibr Assume we want th xecutable code and constants found in the text input sections allocated to the rom memory itext text p gt rom We allocate the data sections to ram data data gt ram We allocate the bss section to ram following the end of data We also place all common variables here Lastly note how we save off the addresses of the start of bss and the end of bss for possible later use at runtime A 37 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide bss _start_bss bss COMMON _end_bss gt ram SYSLIB mylibca a We include a system library in the linkage A 38 Finding Information in Object Files Using the Common Object File Library COFL Table B 1 To use a function from the 1ib1d960 a common object file library COFL call the function from your C source text and link the assembled object file with the COFL Put the following lines in your C source text before the first COFL function call include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h Add the directory containing 1dfcn h to your host system compiler search
111. COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Example C 5 Line Number Entry Declaration struct lineno union long 1_symndx long l_paddr l_addr unsigned short 1_inno char padding 2 define LINENO struct lineno define LINESZ sizeof LINENO Symbol Table symbol table index of func name paddr of line number line number not used The symbol table consists of at least one fixed length entry per symbol with some symbols followed by auxiliary entries Each entry includes the value the type and other information Example C 6 shows the order in which symbols are listed f_symstr in the file header points to the beginning of the symbol table The _nsyms field in the file header contains the total number of entries in the symbol table C 16 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Example C 6 COFF Symbol Table file name 1 function 1 local symbols for function 1 function 2 local symbols for function 2 static variables file name 2 function 1 local symbols for function 1 static variables defined global symbols undefined global symbols Symbol Table Entries The symbol table consists of two general kinds of entries each 24 bytes long The first type is the main entry representing a symbol The format of the main entry is shown in Table C 9 The second type of entry is an auxiliary entry whose format varies depending on how i
112. Dim 0 Dim 1 Dim 2 Dim 3 a5 Identification String Date Time ml _index 0x00000060 3 0x1000 int static 0 _index ml bss 0x00000060 3 0x1200 static 1 bss a3 0x00000004 0x0000 0x0000 6 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Here is part of the b out symbol table The s column identifies the section as in gnm960 output The o column indicates whether each symbol is ordinary 0 a leaf entry point L or a system procedure entry point s gcc960 c Fbout t c gdmp960 t t o BOUT SYMBOL TABLE Value 5 O Symbol Name 4 0x00000000 gcc2_compiled 0x00000000 gnu_compiled_c 0x00000030 D _arr 0x00000000 T _main 0x00000060 b _index 0x00000000 U _func 0x00000000 text 0x00000030 d data 0x00000060 b bss Here is part of the ELF symbol table For more information on ELF symbol tables refer to the 80960 Embedded Application Binary Interface ABI Specification gcc960 c Felf t c gdmp960 t t o Index Value Size Binding Type Section Oth Name 0 0x00000000 0 LOCAL NONE UNDEFINED 0x0 1 0x00000000 0 LOCAL SECTION text 0x0 text 2 0x00000000 0 LOCAL SECTION data 0x0 data 3 0x00000000 0 LOCAL SECTION bss 0x0 bss 4 0x00000000 0 LOCAL SECTION shstrtab 0x0 shstrtab 5 0x00000000 0 LOCAL SECTION strt
113. RI IEEE 695 Object Module Format Specification Rev 4 0 August 16 1989 This chapter contains only those parts of the HP MRI IEEE 695 specification that you need to understand output for the COFF to IEEE 695 converter cvt960 This chapter omits the following e Target specific information not pertinent to the i960 processor family e Translator output information for high level languages other than C e Memory location information for relocatable modules Only position dependent absolute modules are described e Any other information not relevant to debugging and using output from the cvt960 utility If you need a complete IEEE 695 object module specification you should consult the IEEE or MRI HP version as appropriate for your application The Related Publications section in Chapter 1 provides ordering information for both The IEEE Trial Use 695 standard describes both an ASCII and a binary version of the format MRI and HP implement the more compact binary form Derived from the IEEE Trial Use Standard 695 the HP MRI specification includes extensions and limitations required to support MRI and HP products i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Terminology Table D 1 The IEEE specification defines a term that is redefined in this chapter The term applies to the basic division of an object file that is referred to as a command Since this conflicts with the IEEE 695 use of command the basic unit is ren
114. System V m4 These extra facilities are all suppressed by using the c option unless overridden by other command line options e Inthe n notation for macro arguments N can contain several digits while UNIX System V m4 accepts one digit only This allows mpp960 macros to take any number of arguments not only nine Macro Processor mpp960 e When files included with include and sinclude are not found in the working directory they are sought in a user specified search path The search path is specified by the 1 option and the 1960 INC environment variable e Arguments to undivert can be non numeric in which case the named file is included uninterpreted in the output e Formatted output is supported through the format built in which is modeled after the C library function printf e Searches and text substitution through regular expressions are supported by regexp and pat subst e On UNIX but not in Windows the output of shell commands can be read into mpp960 with esyscmd e There is indirect access to any built in macro with builtin e Macros can be called indirectly through indir e The name of the current input file and the current input line number are accessible through the built ins __file__ and __line e The format of the output from dumpdef and macro tracing can be controlled with debugmode e The destination of trace and debug output can be controlled with debugfile In addition to the above extensions mpp96
115. TMPDIR environment variable When you do not use the 1 modifier the archiver uses the directory specified in TMPDIR Without either 1 or TMPDIR the archiver uses the directory specified in P_tmpdir defined in the stdio h standard C header file Option and Modifier Reference You can provide the archiver with the names of external files that you would like added to the archive or you can tell the archiver the names of any archive members that you would like extracted into external files Use the options and modifiers for the following operations To create an archive or to modify the archive members use r or u see Figure 2 1 To modify an archive without modifying the members or external files use m Or s To delete the members use d To modify the external files use x To print information about the archive and its members without modifying the archive contents use p or t To display the archiver operation use v To display the archiver version information use v or v960 2 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 6 Figure 2 1 Archive Member Replace and Update Operations r or u No Create Archive Capture Next Filename in Namelist Last Filename Processed Yes End EA Filename 2 Archive Any Member No Replace Existing Member r Only in Archive Yes File More Recent Than u Only Member u Only OSD308
116. TN1 Version number of tool ASN4 Year e g 1990 ASN5 Month 1 12 ASN6 Day 1 31 ASN7 Hour 0 23 ASN8 Minute 0 59 ASN9 Second 0 59 D 29 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Block End BE The BE record extends the IEEE standard and is used in conjunction with a BB record The BE record for type 4 6 and 11 BB records are different than others as indicated in the following definitions Block End General SF9 SF9 Record type Block End for block types 4 and 6 SF9 n1 SF9 Record type nl Expression defining the ending address of the function in minimum address units Block End for block type 11 SF9 n1 SF9 Record type nl Expression defining the size in minimum address units of the module section Data Part The data part contains records defining fixed data for the module and is always loaded at the current PC value in the current section The current section is defined by the SB record and the PC is defined by the ASP record If no SB record is defined the current section is specified as 0 If no ASP record is defined the PC for a section is initially set to the start of the section HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format NOTE Section 10 1 of the IEEE Trial Use Standard says that the current section is 0 before any SB records are encountered Section 10 2 specifies that if no ST record is present for a section the type is absolute and shall have an assignment to it
117. Table C 12 provides definitions of the storage classes Table C 12 Storage Classes Mnemonic C_EFCN C_NULL C_AUTO C_EXT C_STAT C_REG C_EXTDEF C_LABEL C_ULABEL C_MOS C_ARG C_STRTAG Decimal Value OMAN AOAKRWOND OL k oO Hexadecimal Value Storage Class physical end of a 0x0000 unknown 0x0001 automatic variable 0x0002 external symbol 0x0003 static variable 0x0004 register variable 0x0005 external definition 0x0006 label 0x0007 undefined 0x0008 member of structure 0x0009 function argument in an argument block 0x000A structure tag continued amp C 24 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 12 Storage Classes continued Decimal Mnemonic Value C_MOU 11 C_UNTAG 12 C_TPDEF 13 C_USTATIC 14 C_ENTAG 15 C_MOE 16 C_REGPARM 17 C_FIELD 18 C_AUTOARG 19 C_BLOCK 100 C_FCN 101 C_EOS 102 C_FILE 103 C_LINE 104 C_ALIAS 105 C_HIDDEN 106 C_SCALL 107 C_LEAFEXT 108 C_LEAFSTAT 113 Hexadecimal Value Storage Class 0x000B member of union 0x000C union tag 0x000D type definition 0x000E uninitialized static variable 0x000F enumeration tag 0x0010 member of enumeration 0x0011 function argument in a register 0x0012 bit field 0x0013 function argument in the callee s frame 0x0064 beginning and end of 0x0065 beginning and end of 0x0066 end of 0x0067 filename 0x0068 used only by utility programs 0x0069 duplicated tag 0x006A used to avoid name
118. a 16 2 Command line Invocation 2 eect eee eeeeetttee eee eteeee 16 2 Invocation Through the Assembler cccceeeeeeeeees 16 3 Invocation Examples 2 ce sdseteccctaceatvads wor eetaeeeadsseeteles 16 4 Output File ROR Al ste cneitt tat acdtentt Seater oa eats 16 4 User Interacti Nn ssnin ea eaten 16 5 Translat Errol Siia aeie iaie 16 5 Translation Warnings strescccsasccdenmeaceeractentertaceeecuneastenerts 16 5 Known Limitations sseesseeeeneeeeeeesseentrrnrrrssrrrrrrrnnnrseernnne 16 6 Appendix A Linker Command Language IMtrodUC ON segrei eai a E A EA EAEk A 1 Expressions and Operators cccccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees A 2 Linker Directives Reference cceceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 4 MEMORY Configuring Memory Regions 268 A 5 Default Linker AlloCation ccececeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeenaees A 7 SECTIONS Defining Output Sections ceee A 8 FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION Allocating Space for Common SyMbols cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 25 DEFINED Finding Symbols cc cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 25 ADDR ALIGN NEXT Finding Addresses 5 A 25 SIZEOF Finding Section Sizes ceeeeeeeeeeeees A 27 STARTUP Specifying a Startup File ceee A 27 ENTRY Defining the Entry Point 000 eee A 28 PRE_HLL Specifying Libraries to be Processed Before the High level Libraries A 28 HLL S
119. a de eases D 5 D 3 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Built in Types D 8 D 4 Processor NAMeO s ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneeeeeeeeeeeeees D 12 D 5 Attribute Definitions for the AD Extension Part D 15 D 6 Attribute Definitions for the Environmental Part D 16 D 7 Attribute Definitions for the External Part D 18 D 8 Summary of Permitted Block Nesting D 22 D 9 Attribute Numbers Blocks and Descriptions D 27 D 10 Miscellaneous Record Codes cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeees D 46 Overview This chapter introduces the i960 processor software utilities and their documentation It also describes the conventions used throughout this manual Software Utilities and Related Tools The i960 processor software utilities are part of a toolset for developing embedded applications for the 1i960 Sx Kx Cx Jx Hx and Rx processors This toolset contains a C C compiler several libraries an assembler a debugger and the utilities described in this manual and in on line hypertext For information on all the related documentation including the tools hypertext see your Getting Started with the i960 Processor Development Tools manual Each utility also has a help option that displays a summary of the utility s invocation options Table 1 1 lists the software utilities that are described in this manual i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 1 2 Table
120. ab 0x0 strtab 6 0x00000000 Q LOCAL SECTION symtab 0x0 symtab 7 O0x00000000 0 LOCAL SECTION rel text 0x0 rel text 8 0x00000000 0 LOCAL FILE ABSOLUTE 0x0 tise 9 0x00000000 0 LOCAL NONE text 0x0 gcc2_compiled 10 0x00000000 0 LOCAL NONE text 0x0 _gnu_compiled_c 11 0x00000000 0 LOCAL NONE bss 0x0 _index 12 0x00000000 Q GLOBAL NONE data 0x0 _arr 13 0x00000000 0 GLOBAL NONE text 0x0 _main 14 0x00000000 0 GLOBAL NONE UNDEFINED 0x0 _func Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 The last example shows the dumper s display of the COFF section headers dmp960 t o h x x SECTION HEADERS Name Paddr Vaddr Scnptr Relptr Lnnoptr Align Size Nreloc Ninno Flags text 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000098 0x000000f4 0x00000124 0x00000010 0x0000002c 4 4 REG TEXT data 0x00000030 0x00000030 0x000000c4 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000010 0x00000030 0 0 REG DATA bss 0x00000060 0x00000060 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000010 0x00000004 0 0 REG BSS Archive Support With release 5 1 and later gdmp960 supports dumping of archive files and archive file members Previous versions of the dumper only worked with object files Archive support allows you to dump e all members of an archive e one or more object files within an archive e information on the structure of an archive e g the archive symbol list The table below lists the options that allow archive support Option Descriptio
121. acro call is not void The output is printed directly on the standard error output define foo Hello World gt define echo SQ gt traceon foo echo gt foo error gt mpptrace 1 foo gt Hello World echo gnus and gnats error gt mpptrace 1 echo gt gnus and gnats The number between dashes is the depth of the expansion The depth is 1 most of the time signifying an expansion at the outermost level but it increases when macro arguments contain unquoted macro calls See the d option next topic for information on controlling the details of the debug display i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Controlling Debugging Output The d option to mpp960 controls the amount of detail presented when using the macros described in the preceding sections The flags following the d option can be one or more of the following a V Show the actual arguments in each macro call This applies to all macro calls if the t flag is used otherwise only the macros covered by calls of traceon Show several trace lines for each macro call A line is shown when the macro is seen but before the arguments are collected a second line is shown when the arguments have been collected and a third line is shown after the call is complete Show the expansion of each macro call if it is not void This applies to all macro calls if the t flag is used otherwise it appli
122. ages produced Discussion To split a memory image into smaller ROM images use split Each output ROM image filename is of the form name nm n indicates the vertical position of the ROM image from 0 the lowest part of the memory address range to m length r length m indicates the horizontal position of the ROM image from 0 the first block of r width bits in the m width bits wide data path to m width r width Subsequent permute directives use the ROM image r length and r width Example The following produces four files named a nm as shown in Figure 12 4 mkimage hello a image split a image 262144 32 65536 8 a 12 22 ROM Image Builder rom960 Figure 12 4 split Command Example a image As It Is Stored 8 Bits i 0 1 2 3 4 5 262144 6 Bytes 7 8 9 SJ a image As It Is Understood 32 Bits fo AF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 65536 8 9 10 11 Bytes a 00 a 01 a 02 a 03 ROM Images Created o 3 fo En OSD1701 Related Topics mkimage permute d 12 23 Section size Printer gsize960 siz960 This chapter describes the section size printer used for displaying the sizes of archive members object file sections and entire files NOTE Before using this tool make sure your object file or archive is in host endian byte order To change the byte order use the cof960 objcopy converter described in Chapter 3 Invocation Invo
123. amed to be a record Object module records are predefined with a record type byte in the range E0 through srr The term library is used throughout to mean a single file with more than one relocatable module The term MAU is used throughout to mean minimum addressable unit e g a byte 8 bits on the i960 processor Table D 1 shows the initial bytes of IEEE formats described in this section Initial Bytes of IEEE Elements Prefix Description 00 7F Simple number in the range 0 to 127 or 7 bit ASCII string with length 0 to 127 80 84 Number larger than 127 or negative 0 to 4 bytes follow 80 is used as a place holder and indicates that the value was not provided 89 9F Unused BE BF Function values C0 DA Variable letters null A Z DB DD Unused DE DF Extension length If DE the next byte is the length of an 8 bit string between 0 and 255 bytes long If DF the next two bytes in high order low order format are the length of an 8 bit string between 0 and 65535 bytes long E0 FA Record headers FB FF Unused HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Nomenclature The following nomenclature is used throughout this chapter e Braces surround a required field e Brackets surround an optional field e Dollar Signs precede character representations of hexadecimal numeric values Number Format Numbers are used to define byte counts for fields and to specify numeric parameters Thes
124. an byte order Invocation Invoke the dumper as dmp 960 i er gan 960 option ilenames dmp 960 invokes the dumper for backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 Release 3 5 and later gdmp 960 invokes the dumper for backwards compatibility with GNU 960 Release 2 0 1 and later option an option listed in Table 6 1 Invoking the dumper without any options disassembles the contents of all sections i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 6 2 Table 6 1 filenames one or more filenames separated by spaces indicating files to be displayed You can specify complete pathnames dmp960 gdmp960 Options Option Effect a disassembles all sections in an object file Use this to examine the raw DWARF information in a file A SA SB KA Specifies architecture for which you are disassembling KB CA CF JA This options does not currently affect disassembly JD JF JT HA HD HT RD RP RM RN VH COREO CORE CORE2 CORES ANY c d f F function displays the string table disassembles all sections loaded into target memory Unless otherwise specified text sections appear as assembly language and data sections appear as hexadecimal bytes When no options are specified when invoking the dumper d is assumed as the default option disassembles sections as hexadecimal bytes regardless of the section type The physical address of every fourth word appears at the beginning of each line
125. aration Name Description 0 7 char s_name 8 character section name padded with zeros 8 11 long int s_paddr physical address of section 12 15 long int s_vaddr virtual address of section 16 19 long int s_size section size in bytes 20 23 long int s_scnptr file pointer to raw data 24 27 long int s_relptr file pointer to relocation entries 28 31 long int s_Innoptr file pointer to line number entries 32 33 unsigned short s_nreloc number of relocation entries 34 35 unsigned short s_ninno number of line entries 36 39 long int s_ flags flags 40 43 unsigned long s_align alignment of the section to the int specified byte boundary NOTE The Intel 80960 assembler rounds section sizes to the next higher 4 byte word boundary Section Header Declaration The C structure declaration for the section headers is in the coff h header file Example C 2 shows the declaration format Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Example C 2 Section Header Declaration struct scnhdr char s_name 8 section name long s_paddr physical address long s_vaddr virtual address long s_size section size long s_scnptr file ptr to section raw data long s_relptr file ptr to relocation long s_lnnoptr file ptr to line number unsigned short s_nreloc number of relocation entries unsigned short s_ninno number of line entries long s_flags fla
126. arentheses immediately before the colon and opening brace of an output section definition DSECT o section addr spec COPY statements NOLOAD With DsECT you can locate the symbols in an output section without writing any object code to the output file or allocating any memory The global symbols defined in a DSECT section are relocated normally are resolved as needed from the libraries and are available to other sections For example use DSECT to create an overlay section that during execution can re use a memory region no longer needed by a prior section Overlay section data can be read in from peripheral storage during execution To exclude the input section contents from the output section use NOLOAD A NOLOAD output section has no data in the object file but occupies memory and appears in the memory map For example use NOLOAD to reserve a memory region for a section that is linked and located separately To copy the input section contents and all associated information to the output file use copy A Copy output section is not located and occupies no memory Linker Command Language Table A 5 NOLOAD DSECT COPY ORDINARY Example The following allocates one of each nonstandard output section type SECTIONS namel 0x200000 DSECT filel o name2 0x400000 COPY file2 o name3 0x600000 NOLOAD file3 o COFF Binary Representations The COFF binary representations
127. ary installations older than release 5 0 Specifying Linker directive Files A linker directive file can contain input object and library filenames directives options and other directive filenames e To restrict the directive file search path to the current directory specify the filename alone on the command line or with INCLUDE in another directive file with a restricted search path e To use the full search path use the T option or the TARGET directive INCLUDE directives in a file included with T or TARGET also use the full search path Linker Ink960 gld960 The following example links the file1 o and file2 o object files The object files and the 1nk12 14d directive file are in the current directory Instructions and data from file1 o are given lower addresses respectively than instructions and data from file2 o unless otherwise specified in the directive file 1nk960 filel o file2 o 1nk12 1d For more information on linker directive files see Appendix A Naming the Output File Unless you specify otherwise the output file is named a out for COFF output b out for b out format output e out for ELF output The linker overwrites existing files with the default output names To preserve an existing a out b out or e out file use the o option or the OUTPUT directive to specify an output filename Incremental Linking You can use the output of the linker as input to subsequent linker sessions To g
128. ation is somewhat different Assuming the unexpected optional parameters conform to the producer rules above that is they do not alter the interpretation of the information already in the record they are truly discretionary and the reader probably can safely proceed with reading the object module perhaps after printing a warning after checking the object module version number to the effect that unexpected fields were encountered while reading a miscellaneous record Lastly if the version number of the object file is one the reader was designed to consume and either new miscellaneous codes or unexpected fields are encountered the object module is either defective or a producer has broken the rules for that object module version In either case the reader should treat the remainder of the object file with the same or perhaps greater suspicion than when the object module version is newer than that supported by the reader The behavior in the face of all these contingencies is of course left to the implementor of the consumer tool The currently defined miscellaneous information records are documented in Table D 10 D 45 D D 46 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 10 Miscellaneous Record Codes Misc Type Code Meaning module 50 Compiler Id and date stamp Syntax code 50 tool_code type_rule pointer_size compiler_version_string date NN ATN ASN ASN ASN ATN ASN
129. bal symbols constants and C language operators in expressions in linker directive files Names can contain uppercase or lowercase letters numbers dollar signs and underscores _ All numbers are long integers As in C constants are in decimal format unless preceded by 0 for octal or 0x for hexadecimal The value of a symbol corresponds to the value in the symbol table after the link is complete Table A 1 shows the operators in order of precedence Operators on the same level have the same precedence and are processed as encountered Order of Precedence for Operators Precedence Operators Associativity 1 highest unary left 2 1 left 3 left 4 gt gt lt lt left 5 I gt lt lt gt left 6 amp left 7 left 8 amp amp left 9 l left 10 R right 11 lowest amp right To define symbols and assign values to them use assignment statements with the following syntax symbol op expression symbol is the symbol name op is one of the operators amp or Not all assignments require an operator Linker Command Language is the assignment operator expression is a valid expression For example start 10 NOTE The final semicolon is required for all assignment statements Assignment statements are processed in the order they are input to the linker and are evaluated after allocation However for symbols used in the expression the evaluation ad
130. bol table and the string table with the stripper Line numbers do not appear unless the program is compiled with the compiler s debug control If all external references are resolved at link time no relocation information is included The string table is also omitted when the source file contains no symbols with names longer than eight characters i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Figure C 1 Object File Format Definitions and Conventions C 2 File Header Required Header Information Section 1 Header 24 Optional Header Information Section n Header Raw Data for Section 1 Raw Data for Section n Relocation Info for Sect 1 Relocation Info for Sect n Line Numbers for Sect 1 Line Numbers for Sect n Symbol Table String Table Be sure you are familiar with these definitions and conventions before OSD317 using COFF You can find additional terms in the glossary Sections A section is the smallest portion of an object file that can be relocated and treated as a separate entity by the linker By default an object file has three sections that are loaded into memory when the file is executed The sections and their contents are Ces data bss the executable code for each instruction initialized data variables uninitialized data variables Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Fo
131. bucketO will be incremented If the IP is within 0x14 0x20 the hit counter for bucket will be incremented Figure 14 2 Buckets source assembly 1 void f1 0 lda 0x20 g14 2 8 mov g14 g0 3 int k C mov 0 g14 4 for k 0 k lt 9 k 10 mov 8 94 5 14 subo 1 94 94 6 18 cmpible 0 94 0x14 a aeg 20 ret When profiling is completed the performance data is transferred to the host so it can be displayed using the ghist960 reporting tool If in the example above bucket0 receives 1 of the program s total execution time and bucket receives 5 ghist960 will report something similar to this time function name line file name address 1 0 fl 1 ex c 0x00000000 5 0 fl 4 ex c 0x00000014 Debugging information embedded within the executable allows ghist960 to report roughly which lines of C source code were executed most frequently 14 3 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Parameters that Effect Profiling Table 14 2 14 4 The ghist960 library defines several user modifiable parameters that influence profiling operation The easiest way to manipulate these parameters is through the use of gld960 s defsym command line option although in certain cases it may be useful to modify _prof_start and _prof_end in the application s source code If you use the defsym command line switch the symbol must be preceded by two underscores If you are using the symbols directly in source
132. ch Inhibit CAVE compression Define common symbol space Bsection addr T bss data text addr C D dc dp assigns section addresses suppresses any STARTUP directive searches libraries circularly prevents the linker from compressing CAVE sections reserves space for common symbols with the same effect as a FORCE_ COMMON_ALLOCATION directive see Appendix A Useful only when combined with r locates the sections consecutively in the default sequence uses the startup routine specified with STARTUP in the directive file searches libraries once linker compresses CAVE sections does not reserves space for common symbols continued amp 7 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 7 1 Linker Options continued Name Option Define symbol defsym name expr Entry point esymbol Format Fcoff Fboout Felf Fill fvalue Big endian G target Decision maker gcdm Sort common H symbols Help h Compress J Library search Ldir path 7 8 Effect defines an absolute symbol defines the primary entry point selects COFF b out or ELF as the output format initializes the gaps within a section specifies that input files and output files are for a big endian target Valid only for COFF or ELF files invokes gcdm960 optimization decision maker sorts common symbols by size prints help and terminates merges duplica
133. cifies an additional directory for the g1d960 invocation library and directive file search path G960LLIB library and directive file search path I960LIB specifies additional directories for the 1nk960 invocation I960LLIB library and directive file search path For more information on how setting these environment variables affects the linker see the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 Linker Ink960 gld960 Library Naming Conventions and Search Order The 1 abbr option specifies an abbreviation for one of the six standard library types standard ANSI math floating point C iostream library functions 64 bit integer support The linker combines the abbreviation for the type with the architecture option and big endian and position independent code and data options if any to generate a list of candidate library names abbrqual a libabbrqual a abbrarchqual a libabbrarchqual a abbr is the argument of the 1 option one of c which contains the standard ANSI C functions m which contains the standard ANSI math functions h which contains the accelerated floating point functions for processors without on chip floating point support i which contains C iostream library Lal which contains a MON960 low level library u which contains 64 bit integer support functions qua1 is null unless big endian PIC or PID options are specified on the linker command line Then qua is one of
134. ct file only The command gdmp960 q Oa o Oc o lib a produces the following output a o File OMF Host Byte Order Target Byte Order Croz File OMF Host Byte Order Target Byte Order a o elf big little CLO elf big little 6 15 Linker Ink960 gld960 Overview The linker lets you combine unlinked or partially linked object files and libraries into programs for debugging or execution on any i960 processor Linking can include e configuring a program for the target memory including the addresses and section combinations e searching libraries to resolve external references e adding preserving or removing symbolic debugging information e defining or redefining global symbols e changing callj and calljx to branch and link or system calls e patching all relocatable instructions data and debug information in ELF DWARF Though you can specify most of the linker options to perform these functions on the command line most users use a combination of command line options and a linker directive file to provide input to the linker CTOOLS provides a number of linker directive 1d files in the SG960BASE 1960BASE 1ib directory Typically users store most commands for allocating memory blocks and configuring memory in the linker directive file They then use the command line to invoke the linker specify the object files to be linked specify the linker directive file and include any
135. d or updated in the archive This date is returned from a system call format of the date is system dependent fields contain the user and group identification numbers of the user owning this member On Windows hosts these fields contain zero field is derived from the system and contains an octal representation of the file permissions on the external file at archival time field contains the size in bytes of the member The member s size does not include the extra byte of padding if present at the end of the archive member Each archive file member starts on an even byte boundary with a single new line pad between members if necessary An archive member may not contain any empty areas field contains the header trailer string n When you add members with long names using the replace or update command the archiver creates an extended filename table to store member names longer than 14 characters If the archiver creates the extended filename table the table follows the second archive header If you strip the symbol table the extended filename table follows the first archive member see Figure C 4 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF The Symbol Table The first part of an archive designated Member 0 in Figure C 4 is the archive symbol table The archiver generates this structure when you add the first COFF or b out format file to the archive It is updated whenever necessary
136. data tallies function information Counts the number of hits for each line in a function and associates the sum with line zero of the function displays help output and exits prints the number of hits for each bucket in addition to the standard data suppresses the printing of miscellaneous header and footer information and format lines writes version information to stdout and continues writes version information to stdout and exits Statistical analysis using ghist960 is a multiple step process Generally the procedure is slightly different whether you are using the MON960 or the IxWorks library Ye NOTE When compiling the application to be analyzed it is best to specify a the g debug flag for symbolic debugging allowing ghist960 to report line numbers 14 13 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 14 8 Procedure for Profling Under MON960 and IxWorks Phase Step Instruction MON960 IxWorks Compile 1 Define profiling region optional required Link Assign values to _prof_start _prof_end Compile with g flag recommended recommended Link with run time required required library libhs libixhs 4 Modify library optional required parameters with Assign values to defsym switch timer_freq _buck_size Run 1 Download app to be required required profiled to target 2 Initialize library automatic required Call _init_profile from IxWorks shell 3 Run program with required required no
137. date and time the stripper was created then continues processing v960 displays the stripper version number and the date and time the stripper was created then stops processing x strips all except static and external symbol information z suppresses writing a time stamp in the COFF header file Partial stripping is supported by the b C 1 r and x options For ELF files these options are equivalent Both remove debugging information from the output file All sections named debug are removed from the output file but the file remains relocatable because both the st rtab and rel sections are retained Assembly Language Converter xlate960 The xlate960 program converts assembly language code from 80960 core processors e g 1960 Cx Jx and Hx processors to its COREO e g 80960Rx equivalent xlate960 performs both instruction translations and addressing mode translations Instruction translation occurs when the target architecture does not support a translatable instruction from the source architecture e g movt Addressing mode translation occurs when the target architecture supports a restricted form of an instruction from the source architecture e g callx Table 16 1 lists the instructions converted by xlate960 Table 16 1 Instructions Translated by xlate960 addi lda remo addi lt cc gt ldibt scanbit balxt ldist spanbit bxt ldl stt calljx ldobt stib callxt ldost stis cmpdeci ldq stlt cmpd
138. dices Indices must be unique within a module for each series and must be included with all variable specifications except G Public local I N type symbol indices between 0 and 31 are reserved for special class symbols Normal symbol indices begin at 32 Therefore I3 represents public symbol number 3 in the current module HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D Specification of G variables must not include an index The IEEE standard has been extended to require index values for L S and P variables these are all section indices The binary encoding for the letters A Z is c1 SDA respectively Line Numbers Object modules can have a significant number of line number records included in typical situations To minimize the impact upon the size of the object module the HP MRI standard defines only one NN record per source file A line number is specified by ATN and ASN records only Types Symbol types supply information to debug and analysis tools to aid in determining the size organization and type of program object referenced by the symbol Each symbol has an associated type number and or a mnemonic code letter that serves as a shorthand identifier for the type in the object file and elsewhere Complex Types Table D 2 identifies the supported high level complex types These types must be explicitly defined using an IEEE ty directive see the Define Types TY section in order to correctly represent the use of the symb
139. directives used in this sample file see Appendix A Linker Invocation Once you have set up your linker directive file you are ready to link your object modules To run the linker use the syntax 1nk960 g1d960 options filenames 1nk960 invokes the linker providing backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 Release 3 5 or later g1d960 invokes the linker providing backwards compatibility with GNU 960 Release 2 2 or later options is one or more of the options listed in Table 7 1 filenames is one or more object library or linker directive filenames For example to link the files file1 o file2 o using the linker directives in cycx 1d enter the command 1nk960 filel o file2 o cycx 1d The linker provides many options that let you customize the linking process Table 7 1 lists these options Linker Ink960 gld960 Table 7 1 Linker Options Name Option Effect Default Action Architecture A SA SB KA specifies architecture The uses the KB libraries KB CA CF COREO 3 options let you JA JD JF JT generate code that is HA HD HT compatible with a group of RD RP RM processors The types of RN VH i960 processors supported COREO by each CORE switch are CORE COREO Jx Hx Rx VH ae CORE1 All 80960 architectures VH CORE2 Jx Hx Rx VH CORE3 Cx Jx Hx VH Except for Big Endian mode which is unsupported in VH Section start address Startup alternative Circular sear
140. displays only the member names Example The following example copies the libs a table of contents to contents txt in the current working directory arc960 t libs a gt contents txt e Option or Modifier Updates archives by 2 17 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 18 comparing the file and member dates Discussion To add or replace members with newer versions specify u List specific members to add or replace Omitting the member list updates only the members with corresponding external filenames in the current directory Updating replaces a member only when the date and time stamps on the external file are newer than on the member 7 NOTE The u option has the same effect both as a separate option and as a a modifier of the replace x option Examples 1 The following example places all o files from the current working directory into 1ibo a Existing members are updated and new members are added arc960 u libo a o 2 The following example uses u as a modifier for the replace x option updating file o only if the external file is more recent than the archived version arc960 ru libx a newfiles file o Related Topic Replace Archiver arc960 gar960 v Verbose Modifier Prints the archiver progress information Vv Discussion For complete information about the archiver operation specify v The verbose information is specific to the option you specify as sho
141. dresses reflect the symbol addresses in the output object file Subsequent symbol references access the latest assigned values For conditional statements use the following C syntax condition t expr f expr condition evaluates to true 1 or false 0 The question mark is required t expr is evaluated when the condition evaluates to true f expr is evaluated when the condition evaluates to false The colon separates the f expr from the t expr A 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Linker Directives Reference Table A 2 Use linker directives to e Configure your target memory e Include library files and other directive files e Provide the start up routine NOTE Jn this section the curly braces and are part of the directive syntax and must be entered as shown Square brackets i and and ellipses indicate optional and repeatable elements Linker Directives Directive ADDR ALIGN CHECKSUM DEFINED ENTRY NO FLOAT FORCE_COMMON_ ALLOCATION HLL INCLUDE Operation returns a non relocatable section address assigns non relocatable values to symbols This operation is different from the ALIGN keyword of the SECTIONS directive This option is synonymous with NEXT generates a checksum for the bus confidence test returns whether a symbol is defined in the global symbol table specifies the first executable instruction address specifies whet
142. during linking use v After displaying the message the linker continues processing To display the message without linking use v960 You need not provide any other input After displaying the message the linker stops The message includes the version number of the linker and the date and time it was created 7 54 Linker Ink960 gld960 W Warnings Suppresses warnings Discussion The linker provides warning messages about non standard conditions arising during the link Using w suppresses the warnings Related Topic T Suppress Multiple Definition Symbol Warnings X x Compress Omits local symbols from the output symbol table Discussion Delete local symbols from the output symbol table as follows x removes all local symbols X removes all local symbols beginning with L or a dot When generating a compressed output file you can also remove symbolic information with the strip option s i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide By default all information remains in the output symbol table for symbolic debugging Related Topic s s Strip y Trace Symbol Traces the specified symbol ysymbol symbol identifies the symbol Discussion The linker traces the symbol symbo1 indicating each file where it appears its type and whether the file defines or references it You can trace multiple symbols by using multiple y options If symbo1 comes from a C program you must
143. e option is one of the options listed in Table 14 1 program identifies the application object file for which you are creating the report data_file names the execution profile data file which can be in ASCI asc or binary dat form The file must have an asc or dat extension The ghist960 tool processes the object file by 1 Building an internal database of function entry and line number symbols 2 Determining data file format type by file s extension 3 Processing the profile data matching bucket hit counts to their associated symbols and line number entries A bucket is a range of addresses The number of address bytes in the bucket bucket size determines the range of addresses corresponding to a bucket 4 Printing the internal database for each symbol line entry which includes e the percentage of hits for this particular symbol address range e the function name associated with the symbol e the source file line number of the symbol e the file where the symbol resides e the address of the symbol 14 12 Statistical Profiler ghist960 Optionally you can use the n option to obtain the actual number of hits in the address range Table 14 7 ghist960 Options Option a v960 Using ghist960 Effect prints all buckets with one or more hits Normally only buckets with 1 or more of the hits are printed prints ghist960 s internal symbol table and the standard
144. e followed by alternating sequences of IP addresses and hit counts The following table describes this format Binary Data Format Bytes 0 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 19 Declaration Name Description int bucket size The size of each bucket used during profiling See the library variable buck_size for more information int IP First IP value int hit counter Hit counter associated with first IP int IP Second IP value int hit counter Hit counter associated with second IP int ASCII Data Format The ASCII file format stores and IP followed by a hit count on each line The IP and hit counter are separated by a space and followed by a new line The exception to this is the first line in the file which only contains the bucket size All numbers are represented as hexadecimal but are not preceded by Ox Table 14 11 14 16 ASCII File Format Conients separated by a space Line 0 bucket size 1 IPO hits 2 IP1 hits n Statistical Profiler ghist960 Example Usage of gh ist960 The following example is a simulation that keeps the IP busy in several functions The algorithm defined in the function run_simulation is designed to call a bin function with a frequency that corresponds to a normal distribution bin1 and bin13 should have relatively few hits whereas bin7 should get most of the hits The simulation is run 1000 times example c define DELAY define WAIT
145. e 4 4 COFF Symbol Translation 2 auntie ccidad eae 4 5 IPEE 695 Built in Types xd cesse ici aeerecds oatreectcacrentieeernat cet 4 5 IEEE 695 Converter Warning Messag s ceeeeecee 4 8 Coverage Analyzer gcov960 WAV OCATON vinttserees curcteniceancnead e E E mae yds 5 1 Example Io as ican bet se eet Rae Bk case acted hace se nea BS ce eee 5 6 Example 2A ereere eae E EEE E EAEE EE TEE 5 6 Deel 811 e E E E EE E E E 5 7 Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 IMVOCAION n peeaire TAA lna aad 6 1 Dumping Absolute Symbols seesssesneneeeesseeernerrnnrrsserenee 6 5 ea E E E EEE ETE 6 6 Archive Support isg ai e E atieleahes 6 11 Displaying Archive Structure Information 0 c8 6 12 Dumping the Contents of Archive Members 6 6 14 Linker Ink960 gld960 RON ONS ON ae Es as eee eee ees 7 1 Understanding Memory Blocks and Sections 000 7 2 ELF DWARE Sections nnne acneeei ee 7 4 Named BSS Sections cr csereds tora ctte eer center uwaty 7 4 Working with Linker Directive FileS ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Linker InVOCALONS seiseiessvett citi pieeticnpatautieienuaneat aeadeecenoes 7 6 Specifying Object Files veccts Seen eea cds rbheienbaie mia 7 11 Specifying Libraries ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 7 12 Specifying Linker directive Files ceceeeeeeeeeeees 7 12 Naming the Output File eee eceeccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 7 13 Incremental Linking zeicde
146. e B3 block corresponding to that COFF module The B3 block describes high level debug information COFF symbols that come from any source modules whose file symbol does not end in c or i are considered assembly language symbols The converter leaves any initial underscores intact and places the symbols in the B10 block which describes assembly level debug information The symbols are given IEEE 695 assembler static attributes and built in types IEEE 695 Built in Types Table 4 2 lists the translation of COFF symbols of scalar and pointer types to IEEE 695 built in types The Valid in Public Part column indicates types produced for symbols in the IEEE 695 public part i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 4 6 Table 4 2 Mappings Between COFF and IEEE 695 Built in Types IEEE 695 Code ON DO aK WND O a 066 oa oan an on un un un C ON OORA wWoND O 19 24 25 26 31 COFF Concept T_NULL T_VOID T_CHAR T_UCHAR T_SHORT T_USHORT T_INT T_LONG T_UINT T_ULONG n a n a T_FLOAT T_DOUBLE T_LNGDBL n a n a C_LABEL n a n a n a n a n a Meaning unknown type void return 8 bit signed 8 bit unsigned 16 bit signed 16 bit unsigned 32 bit signed 32 bit unsigned 64 bit signed 64 bit unsigned 32 bit float 64 bit float extended float 128 bit float quoted string code address stack push stack push stack push alias for above 64 bit BCD float reserved Valid in Public Part yes
147. e and derived typ char n_sclass storage class char n_numaux number of aux entries char pad2 2 force alignment ay define n_name _n _n_name define n_nptr _n _n_nptr 1 define n_zeroes _n _n_n _n_zeroes define n_offset _n _n_n _n_offset define SYMENT struct syment define SYMESZ sizeof SYMENT Symbols and Inner Blocks bb eb A block is a compound statement and an inner block is a block that occurs within a function that is itself a block For each inner block that uses local symbols the symbol bb appears in the symbol table right before the first local symbol of that block and the symbol eb appears right after the last local symbol The sequence is shown here bb local symbols for that block eb Example C 8 is a C language example that shows nesting the bb and eb pair and associated symbols Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Example C 8 Nested Blocks E Diock T57 ant ay char c block 2 long a block 3 int x block 3 block 2 block 4 long i block 4 block 1 Example C 9 shows the format of the symbol table for these nested blocks Example C 9 Example of a Symbol Table bb for block 1 bb for block 2 a bb for block 3 x eb for block 3 eb for block 2 bb for block 4 ale bb for block 4 eb for block 1 i960 Processor Softwa
148. e as follows mondb example After the application has completed execution ghist dat will reside on the host To view the results invoke ghist960 ghist960 a example ghist dat Statistical Profiler ghist960 The following output is representative of the profiling session values may change slightly when example is re run Gece 80960 History Profiler V3 0 Reading data from ghist dat Done Profile of time spent in program example 1947 samples taken with bucket size of 64 33 line numbers found time function name line file name address 33 4 bin7 T bins c Oxa00088d0 28 7 bind 6 bins c 0Oxa0008890 PELs bin3 5 bins c 0xa0008850 14 8 bin9 8 bins c 0xa0008910 3 3 binl 4 bins c 0xa0008810 2 6 binll 9 bins c 0xa0008950 Figure 14 6 Hit Frequency for Bin Functions 40 35 30 25 20 15 5 o bin1 bin3 bind bin7 bind bin11 function Frequency of hits 14 19 Stripper gstrip960 str960 The stripper removes symbol table and line number information from your files In most cases you will want to use the stripper after debugging to reduce the code size by removing debug symbols NOTES The stripper overwrites the input file with the stripped file You cannot link or symbolically debug a stripped file Invoke the stripper as str960 gstrip960 option filename str960 invokes the stripper for backwards compat
149. e macro is expanded and the expansion text is pushed back unquoted onto the input and reread The expansion text from one macro call might therefore result in more macros being called if the calls are included completely or partially in the first macro call s expansion Taking a very simple example if foo expands to bar and bar expands to Hello world the input foo expands first to bar and when this is reread and expanded into Hello world How to Define New Macros Macros can be defined redefined and deleted in several different ways It is also possible to redefine a macro without losing a previous value Previous values can be brought back at a later time Defining a Macro The normal way to define or redefine macros is to use the built in define define name expansion which defines name to expand to expansion The expansion of define is void Macro Processor mpp960 The following example defines the macro foo to expand to the text Hello World define foo Hello world gt foo gt Hello world The empty line in the output is there because the newline is not a part of the macro definition and it is consequently copied to the output You can avoid this by using the dan macro Arguments to Macros Macros can have arguments The Nth argument is denoted by n in the expansion text and is replaced by the Nth actual argument when the macro is expanded Here is a example of
150. e offset xn x_file struct long x_scnlen section length Af unsigned short x_nreloc number of relocation entries unsigned short x_nlinno number of line numbers x_scn struct long xotyfritis tv fill value unsigned short x_tvlen length of tv unsigned short x_tvran 2 tv range x_tv info about tv section in auxent of symbol tv x 1960 processor specific 2nd aux entry formats struct long x_stindx sys table entry x_sc system call entry struct unsigned long x_balntry BAL entry point x_bal BAL callable function continued amp Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Example C 10 Auxiliary Symbol Table Entry continued x 1960 processor 2nd and 3rd aux entry formats wad struct unsigned long x_timestamp identification time stamp char x_idstring 20 producer identity string x_ident char a sizeof struct syment force aux to syment size define AUXENT union auxent define AUXESZ sizeof AUXENT String Table Symbol table names longer than eight characters are stored next to each other in the string table each symbol name is delimited by a NULL byte The first four bytes of the string table are the size of the string table in bytes offsets in the string table are therefore 4 or more In this example the file has two symbols
151. e specifications can have two forms e Ifthe value is between 0 127 decimal the number is 0 7F e If the value is greater than 127 decimal then the number must be defined by 1 byte of count with the high order bit set 80 followed by the indicated number of bytes of numeric data with the most significant byte first The range for the count is usually 0 4 i e 80 84 and can be 0 8 on some installations This form is also valid for numbers in the range 0 127 For example 7FFF is encoded as 82 7F FF 3 bytes 0 can be encoded as 00 or 81 00 232 can be encoded as 85 01 00 00 00 00 ete e Omitted optional fields in records may be represented by a byte count of zero Example 80 e Numeric fields are represented in the chapter as n and x e Numeric fields in miscellaneous records are represented as v Name Format Name fields are represented in this chapter by 1d and consist of 1 byte of count 0 127 followed by the indicated number of ASCII characters The HP MRI format extends the IEEE specification to allow the use of any printable ASCII character in a name Characters are represented as hexadecimal values in the file but are represented as quoted characters in this chapter for improved readability as follows name ABCD 04 41 42 43 44 D 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Name fields in miscellaneous records are represented as s The IEEE format al
152. eateietseeeiedonas dear Songtele eed 7 13 Contents Chapter 8 Object Module Format Compatibilities 0 0 0 0 ee 7 14 Link time Optimization cee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 16 Using calljx with the i960 RP Processor 0 000 7 19 Binding Profile Counters to Non Standard Sections 7 19 Environment Variables ccccceessssscceceeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeees 7 20 Library Naming Conventions and Search Order 7 21 Library Search Order When i960 RP Architecture Is Selected 00 eeeeceseecceeeeeeeeeessneeeeeeees 7 24 Linker Options Reference ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 24 Macro Processor mpp960 mpp960 Message Prefixes su katcareaavnsiav aided 8 1 Invoking MP POBO secccncctie tedds eonaienaenienadieedheeietinees 8 2 Lexical and Syntactic Conventions ecc sceeeeeeeeeeeees 8 5 NAMCS EE nase aea euusen aman eae 8 5 Q ted STNG S eiecctcceit elect hens cahb aud pbelnaarad eee eboeatengiots 8 5 Other Tokens aeoaea i e e 8 6 COMIMNGIUS keee errare aaa Aae a AEO EE EEEE EESE 8 6 How to Invoke Macros cccceeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeees 8 6 Macro INVOCATION 6 iiss sacee te tetieisecitenteabeteetnsactnlinpess dete 8 6 Macro Arguments aisefhscecietnnceeted iaele tener ia ticatlonnatetel ee 8 7 Quoting Macro Arguments ic 2 ccncsi vce see siiennnhon 8 7 Macro Expansion a ic caaniacineuwada eacuwanes 8 8 How to Define New Macro
153. eater than 1inenum into linent To specify the function for line number entry searches without reading a line number entry into linent use 1dlinit To specify a new function and read a line number entry use 1dlread To find and read a line number entry without respecifying the function to be searched use 1dliten The ldlinit ldlitem and ldlread functions return SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h Failure can indicate Condition Function The object file contains no line ldlread ldlinit number entries The f cnindx matches no symbol ldlread ldlinit table function entry No line number is equal to or greater 1dlread ldlitem than linenum Finding Information in Object Files Idiseek Idniseek Seeks to the line number entries of an object file section include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldlseek ldptr sectindx LDFILE ldptr unsigned short sectindx int ldnlseek ldptr sectname LDFILE ldptr char sectname Discussion The 1dlseek function seeks to the line number entries of the section specified by sect indx of the COFF file currently associated with ldptr The 1dniseek function seeks to the line number entries of the section specified by sectname The 1dlseek and 1dnlseek functions return SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h e The 1diseek function fails when the variable sect indx is greater than the number of sections in the object file e The 1dni
154. eco ldt stobt cmpinci modac stost cmpinco modify stqt concmpi movl stt concmpo movq subi eshro movt subi lt cc gt extract notor test lt cc gt fault lt cc gt remi xnor ldt Notes t indicates addressing mode translation indicates addressing mode and instruction translation all other instructions support only instruction translation 16 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide NOTE Make sure that your code assembles without error for an 80960 core processor before converting with xlate960 Invocation Command line Invocation To invoke xlate960 from the UNIX command shell or a Windows DOS prompt use the syntax xlate960 options infile xlate960 Invokes the converter options Represents any of the options listed in Table 2 infile Specifies the name of the assembly file to convert 16 2 Assembly Language Converter xlate960 Table 16 2 xlate960 Options Option A arch longcalls o outfile v960 Effect Specifies output architecture type arch can be one of RP RD RM RN COREO Default type is RP Displays translation compatibility errors to the screen matching those inserted in the output file Displays help information xlate960 also displays this information if you run the program without specifying the input file and any other options Uses callx instead of call instructions for translation routine library calls Specifies output filename If this option is
155. ection called mybgtxt for the remaining input section contents More than 10 splits create section names such as mybgt10 and mybgt11 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide e A text section of 196700 bytes splits into four sections named text0 containing the first input sections text1 text2 and text containing the last input sections The linker notifies you of each section split with a warning message unless you suppress all warnings by using the w linker option You receive no other indication of section splits unless you produce a memory map by using the m linker option NOTE The linker treats the new sections created under the same linker directives that applied to the original section Do not put the new names into the directive file Examples 1 The following creates an output section named ab_txt containing the input text sections from all the available input files all the input sections from the abn o file the atxt and atxtq sections from afile o and btxt from bfile o located as described in the MEMORY Configuring Memory Regions section SECTIONS ab tzt text abn o afile o atxt atxtq bfile o btxt 2 The following puts all of the common symbols from all the input files into the mycom output section SECTIONS mycom COMMON Linker Command Language To place common sections from a specific file into a particular section use this form
156. ed The macro is consequently traced from the point it is defined Macro Processor mpp960 The remaining arguments on the command line are taken to be input filenames If no names are present standard input is read A filename of is also taken to mean standard input The input files are read in the sequence given The standard input can be read only once so the filename should appear only once on the command line Lexical and Syntactic Conventions mpp960 separates its input into tokens A token is either a name a quoted string or any single character that is not a part of either a name or a string Input to mpp960 can also contain comments Names A name is any sequence of letters digits and the underscore character _ where the first character is not a digit If a name has a macro definition it is subject to macro expansion Examples of legal names are foo _tmp and name01 Quoted Strings A quoted string is a sequence of characters surrounded by quotes the number of start and end quotes within the string must balance The so called start and end quote characters are the backquote and apostrophe C respectively The value of a string token is the text with one level of quotes stripped off Thus is the empty string and quoted is the string quoted The quote characters can be changed at any time using the built in macro changequote 8 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities
157. egal arguments to forloop gt A trailing newline is not printed automatically so it must be supplied as part of the argument as in the example Two utility built ins make it possible to specify the location of the error a filen line expand to the quoted name of the current input file and the current input line number in that file errprint mpp960 __file_ _ line Input error k error gt mpp960 56 errprint 2 Input error gt 8 33 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Exiting from mpp960 If you need to exit from mpp960 before the entire input has been read use mppexit mppexit code This causes mpp960 to exit with exit code code If code is left out the exit code is zero define fatal_error errprint mpp960 file_ line_ fatal error mppexit 1 gt fatal_error This is a BAD one buster error gt mpp960 57 mppexit 5 fatal error This is a BAD one buster After this macro call mpp960 exits with exit code 1 This macro is only intended for error exits since the normal exit procedures are not followed e g diverted text is not undiverted and saved text see mppwrap is not reread Compatibility with Other Macro Processors This section describes the differences between mpp960 and the UNIX System V Release 3 m4 macro processor Extensions in mpp960 mpp960 contains a some facilities that do not exist in UNIX
158. egers short tabptr 10 25 3 The fundamental type of tabptr is 3 short integer the d1 d2 and da3 fields each contain a 3 array and the a4 field is 1 pointer Therefore the type entry in the symbol table contains the hexadecimal number 0xFE3 indicating a three dimensional array of pointers to short integers Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 17 Fundamental Types Decimal Hexadecimal Mnemonic Value Value Definition T_ NULL 0 0x0000 not assigned T_VOID 1 0x0001 void T_CHAR 2 0x0002 character T_SHORT 3 0x0003 short integer T_INT 4 0x0004 integer T_LONG 5 0x0005 long integer T_FLOAT 6 0x0006 floating point T_DOUBLE 7 0x0007 double word T_STRUCT 8 0x0008 structure T_UNION 9 0x0009 union T_ENUM 10 0x000A enumeration T_MOE 11 0x000B member of enumeration T_UCHAR 12 0x000C unsigned character T_USHORT 13 0x000D unsigned short T_UINT 14 0x000E unsigned integer T_ULONG 15 Ox000F unsigned long T_LNGDBL 16 0x0010 long double Table C 18 Derived Types Field Values Decimal Hexadecimal Mnemonic Value Value Definition DT_NON 0 0x00000 no derived type DT_PTR 1 0x0001 pointer DT_FCN 2 0x0002 function DT_ARY 3 0x0003 array i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 19 Type Entries and Storage Classes Table C 19 shows the derived type entries that are legal for each storage class Type Entries by Storage Class Storage Class Function Array Point
159. enerate relocatable linked files for such incremental linking invoke the linker with the r option Linking a non relocatable input file generates a warning message For successful linking non relocatable input files must e have no unresolved external references e be located at the same address as in previous linker invocations 7 13 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Object Module Format Compatibilities You can link b out format COFF or ELF object files and libraries in any combination To determine a file format the linker examines the first two bytes of the file An unrecognized value indicates a linker directive file This feature is useful when using third party archives with the Intel supplied runtime libraries and your application code The runtime libraries are shipped in ELF only effective with CTOOLS RS 0 and later Each archive can have a different Object Module Format OMF and the linkage still completes without error When the linker generates a different output format than the input the linker does not copy the debug information from the input file to the output file For example if you include a b out OMF file in a linkage where the output file OMF is COFF the linker does not copy any of the debug information from the b out file to the output COFF file Ideally you should use one OMF consistently However the following symbol information is translated and incorporated into the output OMF
160. enerated interrupt The specific timer and interrupt used are platform and hardware configuration dependent 14 10 Statistical Profiler ghist960 Table 14 6 Required Resources Resource MON960 IxWorks Hardware Timer TIMER1 Rx TIMER1 Interrupt Vector 11 Oxe2 Library Initialization MON960 When developing code for use with MON960 the low level library libll is linked in by default The start up code defined in libll automatically calls _init_profileQ and _term_profile requiring no intervention from the user IxWorks When developing for IxWorks the MON960 C low level library is not linked with your application In addition IxWorks uses incremental linking Therefore _init_profileQ and _term_profile Q must be explicitly called by either the shell or the application to start and end profiling respectively When _init_profile is called the following sequence occurs 1 The current interrupt vector for TIMER is saved 2 New vector for TIMER is programmed 3 TCR1 TRR1 TMRI1 are modified 4 TIMER interrupt is enabled IMSK modified When _term_profile is called the following occurs 1 The old interrupt vector is restored 2 TMRI is reset 14 11 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide NOTE TCR TRR and TMR1 are not restored to their original values when __term_profile is called Invocation Invoke the statistical profiler with ghist960 option program data_fil
161. er Basic Type C_AUTO no yes yes any except T_MOE C_EXT yes yes yes any except T_MOE C_STAT yes yes yes any except T_MOE C_REG no no yes any except T_MOE C_LABEL no no no T_NULL C_MOS no yes yes any except T_MOE C_ARG yes no yes any except T_MOE C_STRTAG no no no T_STRUCT C_MOU no yes yes any except T_MOE C_UNTAG no no no T_UNION C_TPDEF no yes yes any except T_MOE C_ENTAG no no no T_ENUM C_MOE no no no T_MOE C_REGPARM no no yes any except T_MOE C_FIELD no no no T_ENUM T_UCHAR T_USHORT T_UNIT T_ULONG C_BLOCK no no no T_NULL C_FCN no no no T_NULL continued amp Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 19 Type Entries by Storage Class continued Storage Class Function Array Pointer Basic Type C_EOS no no no T_NULL C_FILE no no no T_NULL C_ALIAS no no no T_STRUCT T_UNION T_ENUM Conditions for the d entries apply to d1 through 413 except that you cannot have two consecutive derived types of function that is you cannot have a function returning a function Although function arguments can be declared as arrays the compiler changes them to pointers by default Therefore a function argument cannot have array as its first derived type Auxiliary Table Entries The auxiliary table entry or entries for a symbol have 24 bytes each Every symbol has an auxiliary table entry with the same number of bytes as the symbol has in the symbol table entry Table C 20 provides a summary of the
162. er option modifier 2 7 A architecture linker option 7 25 arc960 command 2 1 archiver 2 1 a After option modifier 2 7 b Before option modifier 2 8 c create option modifier 2 9 d Delete option modifier 2 10 F Library Format option modifier 2 11 h Help option modifier 2 11 i Insert option modifier 2 8 1 Local option modifier 2 12 m Move option modifier 2 13 o Output Date option modifier 2 14 options summary 2 2 p Print option modifier 2 14 r Replace option modifier 2 15 s Symbol Table option modifier 2 16 t Table of Contents option modifier 2 17 u Update option modifier 2 18 v Verbose option modifier 2 19 V Version option modifier 2 20 v960 Version option modifier 2 20 x Extract option modifier 2 21 z Suppress Time Stamp option modifier 2 22 b Before archiver option modifier 2 8 B section start address linker option 7 27 b out COFF ELF converter 3 1 options summary 3 2 backslash character use with tools 1 5 BSS sections linker 7 4 Cc c circular library search linker option 7 29 c Create archiver option modifier 2 9 C startup alternative linker option 7 29 CAFF format for i960 processors C 1 callj calljx link time optimization 7 16 checksum rom960 directive 12 7 cof960 command 3 2 object converter 3 1 COFF b out ELF converter 3 1 options summary 3 2 COFF format for i960 processors C 1 COFF symbol translation cvt
163. er translates each COFF line number record to a IEEE 695 ATN ASN pair possibly causing one to many mappings in the output module numbers as in the following examples e COFF source line information provides the same code address for the line of a function block s token and the first executable line of code Using the code fragment below for example the converter puts the line containing and the line containing int foo 1 lines 2 and 4 in the COFF symbol table with the same code address is main 2 Se 4 int foo 1 e COFF source line information provides multiple addresses for the same source line under some conditions For example a while loop associates the source line of the while statement with the machine address of the branch to the loop condition test at the end of the loop The machine code associated with the loop condition test produces an additional line number entry with the same row number as the branch These two line number groups are translated for the while loop with the same line number and different addresses COFF to IEEE 695 Converter cvt960 COFF Symbol Translation The compiler prefixes most C language names with an underscore _ when creating COFF symbols When the converter finds a symbol with an initial underscore and a file symbol ending in c or i it treats the symbol as a C name with the underscore prefix The converter strips out the initial underscore and places the symbol in th
164. erences This does however slightly change the semantics of 7 29 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 30 links formerly undefined symbols may be defined by other libraries in the loop Example lib1 and 1ib2 interrelate as follows lib1 defines references object file x a X 0 y y o lib2 defines references object file a y a o If you link using gld960 ux libl a lib2 a the linker opens 1ib1 a first finds symbol x resolved in the x o object file and reads it in It finds no other references to symbols it needs so it closes libl a The linker then opens 1ib2 a and resolves the symbol a referenced in the x o file from 1ib1 a It reads in the a o object file It finds no other symbols it can resolve so it closes 1ib2 a However symbol y is left unresolved because it is defined in 1ib1 a and referenced in a o from 1ib2 a This is a circular definition The c option resolves circular definitions by iterating through the list of libraries and fetching object files from them as needed for each loop The search is complete when e there are no more undefined symbols OR e neither the number of global symbols nor the number of undefined symbols has changed from the previous iteration Linker Ink960 gld960 D Inhibit CAVE section compression Prevents the linker from compressing CAVE sections D Discussion By default the linker compresses any sections set up for Compression As
165. ernal references F_LNNO set if line numbers were stripped out F_LSYMS set if local symbols were stripped out F_AR382WR set if byte ordering is little endian F_AR382W set if byte ordering is big endian F_PIC set if the file contains position independent code continued amp C 5 C 6 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 2 File Header Flags continued Mnemonic Definition F_PID set if the file contains position independent data F_LINKPID set if the file is suitable for linking with position independent code or data F_BIG_ENDIAN_T set if target information is in big endian byte order F_SECT_SYM set in symbols representing section names The upper four bits of the flag s word contains the architecture type Table C 3 lists the flag names Table C 3 Architecture Types of File Header Flags Mnemonic Definition F_I960CORE architecture common to all i960 processors F_I960KB or architecture common to KB and SB processors F_I960SB F_I960XA architecture common to KA SA and CA processors F_I960CA architecture common to CA and CF processors F_I960KA or architecture common to KA and SA processors F_I960SA File Type Numbers In the file header the first two bytes indicate the target on which the object file can be executed These file type numbers are defined as follows define I960ROMAGIC 0x0160 read only text segments define I960RWMAGIC 0x0161 read write text segments Co
166. es only to the macros covered by calls of traceon Show the name of the current input file in each trace output line Print a message each time the current input file is changed giving filename and input line number Show the current input line number in each trace output line Print a message when a named file is found through the path search mechanism giving the actual filename used Quote actual arguments and macro expansions in the display with the current quotes Trace all macro calls made in this invocation of mpp960 Add a unique macro call id to each line of the trace output This is useful in connection with the c flag above A shorthand for all of the above flags The default is aeq if no flags are specified with the d option The examples in the previous two sections assumed the default flags The built in macro debugmode allows on the fly control of the debugging output format debugmode flags Macro Processor mpp960 The flags argument should be a subset of the letters listed above There are three special cases 1 Ifthe argument starts with a the flags are added to the current debug flags If the argument starts with a the flags are removed 3 Ifno argument is present the debugging flags are set to zero as if a was not given and with an empty argument the flags are reset to the default Saving Debugging Output Debug and tracing output can be redirected to files using either the o option t
167. et The result is the true IP relative offset of fumble The branch address must be within 24 bits globl fumble etext tstart space 0x10 X b fumble disassembly for r 0 section text etext O 00000000 word 0x0 4 00000000 word 0x0 8 00000000 word 0x0 c 00000000 word 0x0 10 O8fffff0 b 0x0 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide x RELOCATION INFORMATION Vaddr Symndx Type Name r 0 text 0x00000010 10 IPRMED fumble data bss Line Number Entry Example C 4 Invoke the compiler with the debug option to get a listing of line numbers where you can place breakpoints to make debugging easier All line numbers in a section are grouped by function as shown in Example C 4 and are relative to the beginning of a function The s_innoptr field in the section header points to the first line number entry for that section Line Number Grouping symbol index 0 physical address line number physical address line number symbol index 0 physical address line number physical address line number The first entry for each section has line number zero and contains the symbol table index of the function name Each following entry associates each line number with the address of the code generated for it The structure declaration for line number entries is in the cof f h header file Example C 5 shows the structure declaration for line number entries Common Object File Format
168. ex this must be the same index as specified for the ATN record n2 Section Base address in minimum address units Debug Information Part The Debug Information part contains records that define how to determine the symbol related information for a module at execution time This is required for debuggers that provide high level debugging capabilities For information on the syntax of records in the Debug Information Part see the HP MRI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics section D 20 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Block Begin BB The BB records are an extension to the IEEE 695 Trial Use standard They provide definitions of debugging information related to the high level language definitions for types scope and line numbers They also provide assembly level language definitions for modules and local symbols A block beginning with a BB is terminated with a BE record BB records can be nested according to rules described below Nested BB blocks can be used to capture scoping information The types of BB blocks include BBI Type definitions local to a module BB3 A module A non separable unit of code usually the result of a single compilation i e the symbols associated with a COFF file symbol BB4 A global subprogram BBS A source file line number block BB6 A local static subprogram BB10 An assembler debugging information block BB11 The module portion of a section The following list describes fea
169. filename is a out names the IEEE 695 output file The default output file is the input filename with the extension replaced by x When the input filename has no suffix the converter appends x suppresses the IEEE 695 public and debug parts The converted file contains no line number symbol table or debug information displays converter version information and continues processing displays converter version information and stops processing suppresses warning messages writes constant time stamp Time Zero and command line to output file Time Zero is 4 00 31 December 1969 Examples 1 The following converts a out to a x cvt 960 2 The following displays the converter version information and translates hpx in into hpx x in e asm_tests cvt_960 cvt960 V i e asm_tests cvt_960 hpx in 3 The following translates a out into hpx out stripping the debug information cvt960 s o e asm_tests cvt_960 hpx out COFF to IEEE 695 Converter cvt960 Limitations This section describes parts of the COFF the converter or the IEEE 695 format that can cause conversion problems Position independent Code Data and Symbols The converter translates position independent code and data correctly but position independent code symbols and position independent data symbols lose the flags that mark them as position independent Archives and Relocatable Objects Use the converter only on COFF absolute executable load m
170. format conforms to the IEEE 695 Object Module Format Specification Revision 4 0 Copyright 1987 1989 by Microtec Research Incorporated and Hewlett Packard Note that cvt960 cannot translate b out or ELF format files into IEEE 695 format cvt960 requires that the input COFF file provided for translation be in host endian orientation Use objcopy cof960 to translate the input file into host endian orientation prior to executing cvt960 Invocation To convert files in common object file format COFF to IEEE 695 format invoke cvt960 with the following syntax cvt960 option cvt960 invokes the converter option is one or more of the options listed in Table 4 1 NOTE To convert a file named a out putting the IEEE 695 format output in a x invoke the converter with no options i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 4 2 Table 4 1 Option a Aarch c h i input o output cvt960 Options Effect converts files for use with the MRI Xray user interface pre X263 and earlier versions specifies an 80960 architecture tag for the IEEE 695 output file Valid arch values are CORE0 CORE1 CORE2 CORE3 SA SB KA KB CA CF JA JD JF JT HA HD HT RD RP RM RN and VH See Getting Started for a description of the new COREO CORE3 group architecture options specifies emitting column zero for line entries rather than one displays help information specifies an input COFF file The default input
171. ften it is not known when output is diverted whether the diverted text is actually needed A method of discarding a diversion is needed because all non empty diversions are brought back when the end of input is seen If all diversions should be discarded the easiest way is to end the input to mpp960 with divert 1 No output is produced Macros for Text Handling There are built in macros for manipulating text in various ways extracting substrings searching substituting and so on Calculating Length Of Strings The length of a string can be calculated by len len string which expands to the length of string as a decimal number Macro Processor mpp960 Searching For Substrings Use index to search for substrings index string substring expands to the index of the first occurrence of substringin string The first character in string has index 0 If substring does not occur in string index expands to 1 Searching for Regular Expressions Use the built in regexp to search for regular expressions regexp string regexp replacement which searches for regexp in string The syntax for regular expressions is the same as in GNU Emacs If replacement is omitted regexp expands to the index of the first match of regexp in string If regexp does not match anywhere in st ring it expands to 1 For example regexp GNUs not UNIX lt a z wt gt 5 regexp GNUs not UNIX lt Q w gt 1 If
172. fy HLL with no arguments the linker includes a high level C library abbreviated as 1ibc and the 64 bit integer support library abbreviated as 1ibu Also specifying FLOAT includes the libm high level math library abbreviation for all architectures The libh floating point library abbreviation for the 1960 KA SA Cx Jx Hx and Rx architectures Without FLOAT or with NOFLOAT the linker uses 1ibmstub a instead of any libn library and includes no floating point library To form the library filenames the linker appends the following to the libc libm and libh abbreviations 1 the two letter architecture abbreviation 2 _p for position independence 3 a the standard library filename extension For example e The C library for a non position independent KB program is libckb a e The math library for position independent KB program with FLOAT specified is Libmkb_p a e The floating point library for position independent KA output with FLOAT specified is libhka_p a The linker loads the object files and libraries in the following order 1 2 the gap specified with STARTUP all the object files and libraries listed individually in the invocation in the order listed all the object files and libraries listed individually in the directive files in the order listed Linker Command Language 4 all the libraries specified with HLL or default libraries in response to HLL 5 all the libraries specif
173. g Output Diverted text can be undiverted explicitly using the built in undivert undivert number which undiverts the diversions given by the arguments in the order given If no arguments are supplied all diversions are undiverted in numerical order The expansion of undivert is void divert 1 This text is diverted divert gt This text is not diverted gt This text is not diverted undivert 1 gt This text is diverted Notice the last two blank lines One of them comes from the newline following undivert the other from the newline that followed the divert A diversion often starts with a blank line like this When diverted text is undiverted it is not reread it is copied directly to the current output and it is therefore not an error to undivert into a diversion 8 25 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide When a diversion has been undiverted the diverted text is discarded and it is not possible to bring back diverted text more than once Attempts to undivert the current diversion are silently ignored mpp960 allows named files to be undiverted Given a non numeric argument the contents of the file named are copied uninterpreted to the current output This complements the built in include To illustrate the difference assume the file foo contains the word bar Diversion Numbers The built in divnum expands to the number of the current diversion Discarding Diverted Text O
174. gin BB11 Assembler Section Block End BE11 Assembly Module Block End BE10 Assembly Module Block Begin BB10 Global Extern Variables KN ATN19 ASN Local Variables KK ATN19 ASN Assembler Section Block Begin BB11 Assembly Level Assembler Section Block End BE11 Module Block one for each Assembler Section Block Begin BB11 assembly level Assembler Section Block End BE11 module Assembly Module Block End BE10 D 21 D 22 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 8 Inner BB1 BB1 no BB2 no BB3 no BB4 no BB5 no BB6 no BB10 no BB11 no Table D 8 below illustrates which of the blocks under Inner can be nested within the blocks listed under Outer Some of the blocks require an outer block For example a BB4 block requires that its outer enclosing block be a BB3 Similarly a BB1 or BB2 block requires that its outer enclosing block be the Debug Part or debug Summary of Permitted Block Nesting Outer BB2 BB3 BB4 BB5 BB6 BB10 BB11 debug no no no no no no no yes no no no no no no no no ki no s no no yes no required no no no no no no no no no F no no no yes no yes yes no no no no no no no no no hg no yes no no no no no required no no Supported by HP MRI 695 but not produced by cvt960 The format for each block type is described below Block Type 1 unique type definitions for module F8 01
175. gram represented in the program database Specifying file restricts the operation of gcov960 to the file module identifies a module within file option is one or more of the options listed in Table 5 2 5 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 5 1 Control Cc 5 2 If you supply the optional file module input along with the r1 option gcov960 reads the source and produces an annotated listing of the source along with the coverage data in file cov In the annotated source each statement within a basic block is prefixed with the number of times it has been executed Lines that have not been executed are prefixed with HHEHEE EE Note that in this chapter a basic block refers to a single entry single exit code region containing no branching mechanisms The number of lines marked with may not equal the number of blocks listed in the gcov960 report gcov960 Controls Argument Effect 3 0 a Nn produces program level coverage report produces module and program level coverage report produces function module and program level coverage report produces a source and module level coverage report produces the n most frequently executed lines when n is positive or least frequently executed when n is negative produces a call graph listing of the program The h argument is optional it attaches to the report an explanation of how to interpret the call graph listing
176. gs unsigned long s_align section alignment define SCNHDR struct scnhdr define SCNHSZ sizeof SCNHDR Section Header Flags Section header flags indicate the section type Table C 6 shows the flag format The flag field occupies one byte The value in the first five bits of the byte indicates the section type The value in the last three bits indicates the contents of the section Figure C 2 shows the flag field for a regular text section C 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Figure C 2 Flag Field Values 7 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 l l Section Section Contents Type OSD1134 Table C 6 Section Header Flags Mnemonic Flag Definition STYP_REG 0x00 regular section allocated relocated loaded STYP_DSECT 0x01 dummy section not allocated relocated not loaded STYP_NOLOAD 0x02 noload section allocated relocated not loaded STYP_GROUP 0x04 grouped section formed from input sections STYP_PAD 0x08 padding section not allocated not relocated loaded STYP_COPY 0x10 copy section for a decision function used in updating fields not allocated not relocated loaded relocation and line number entries processed normally STYP_TEXT 0x20 section contains executable text STYP_DATA 0x40 section contains initialized data STYP_BSS 0x80 section contains uninitialized data C 10 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Sections
177. h sectname e Either function fails when the specified section has no section data or when the function cannot seek to the section data The first section index is 1 Idtbindex Computes the symbol table entry index include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h long ldtbindex ldptr LDFILE ldptr Discussion The 1dtbindex function returns the index of the symbol table entry at the current position of the COFF file associated with 1dptr The index is a long integer You can use the index in subsequent calls to ldtbread Calling ldtbindex immediately after reading a particular symbol table entry returns the next entry index because 1dtbindex returns the index of the symbol table entry that begins at the current position of the object file i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The 1dtbindex function fails when the object file contains no symbols or when the object file is not positioned at the beginning of a symbol table entry The first symbol index in the symbol table is 0 Idtbread Reads an indexed symbol table entry include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldtbread ldptr symindex symbol LDFILE ldptr long symindex SYMENT symbol Discussion The 1dtbread function reads the symindex symbol table entry of the COFF file associated with 1dptr into memory beginning at symbol The ldtbread function returns SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h Failure
178. hanging the Quote Characters ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeees 8 20 Changing Comment DelimiterS cccceceeeeeeeeeeees 8 21 Saving MPUL lt toca ne hcrs es ame eek aka 8 22 File INGIUSIONicsicoieesetiacealndececnh E E E ERS 8 22 Including Named Files sesseennnnnneeeeeseernrrrnersssrrrrernn 8 22 Searching for Include Files eeecesccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 23 Diverting and Undiverting Output eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 8 23 Diverting Output vecseccesstan ced sececcensdescues ecckagestdasecancchagentes 8 24 Undiverting Output secure ee ceded cern hmadiditieth oveaeanes 8 25 DIVErSIONNIGIMIDE IS tice coated ciate Verte ie edt atcad stot ceeds 8 26 Discarding Diverted Text cccccececeeeeeeeeeestsseeeeeeeees 8 26 Macros for Text Hangling cccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 26 Calculating Length Of StringS eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 26 Searching For SubStringS cceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 27 Searching for Regular Expressions 0 cceeeeeeeeeeees 8 27 Extracting Substrings sa s ce csetcasdceeccectidecvetssaetseatedaceetede 8 28 Translating Characters cc icetgeseeteeeietanedntsie betes 8 28 Substituting Text by Regular Expression 0 0000 8 28 Formatted Output cccccceeeeeeseesecceeeeeeeeeeeseesneeeeeeeees 8 29 Macros for Doing ArithmetiC ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeee 8 30 vi Contents Chapter 9 Chapter
179. he archive sample a The name lister displays the filename where each symbol is found This example uses the T options to truncate symbol names which keeps the output columns equally spaced nam960 r T sample a Symbols from symbol a hello o hello o Name Value Class Type Size Line Section hell gcc2_compiled 0x00000000 label text h _gnu_compiled_c 0x00000000 label text hello o _main 0x00000010 extern Ox0018 text hello o _printf Ox00000000 extern Symbols from symbol a byte o byte o Name Value Class Type Size Line Section bye o gcc2_compiled 0x00000000 label text b __gnu_compiled_c 0x00000000 label text bye o _main 0x00000010 extern Ox0018 text bye o _printf 2 0x00000000 extern The following suppresses the header No column labels appear in the output nam960 h hello o hello c Erke _main O extern ao ch eas Gar a 16 text _printf O extern 10 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 3 The following displays the proto o symbols in parseable format nam960 p proto o f prote c 00000000 T _main 00000352 T _watering 00000368 T _is_time 00000416 T _watered 00000000 U _printf 00000000 U _scanf 00000000 U _init_bentime 00000000 U _exit 00000000 U _bentime 00000000 U _srand48 00000000 U _lrand48 4 The following displays only the external symbols nam960 e hel
180. he relocation entries Reads the section header given the section number Seeks to the section Returns the long index of the symbol table entry at the current position Reads a specific symbol table entry Seeks to the symbol table Extracting File Header Information To extract COFF file header information use one of the macros listed in Table B 2 Each header information macro takes as an argument an ldfile structure returned by a call to 1dopen Finding Information in Object Files Table B 2 Common Object File Interface Macros Macro Definition TYPE Returns the file type number For archive files TYPE returns ARTYPE as defined in Idfcn h IOPTR Returns the file pointer opened by Idopen and used by the C library I O functions OFFSET Returns the object file beginning address The address is zero except for archive file members HEADER Obtains the COFF file header structure Function Reference This section describes the COFL functions alphabetically Closely related functions are described together For example the 1dlinit and lditem functions are grouped with 1dlread Idahread Reads an archive member header include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldahread ldptr arhead LDFILE ldptr ARCHDR arhead Discussion To read an open archive header use 1dahread The header of the archive currently associated with 1dptr is put into memory beginning at arhead B 3 i960 Pr
181. her to use the extended arithmetic and floating point libraries forces allocation of space for common symbols even for non final relocatable linking specifies the high level support libraries locates and processes the specified directive file continued amp Linker Command Language Table A 2 Linker Directives continued Directive INPUT MEMORY NEXT OUTPUT OUTPUT_ARCH PRE_HLL SEARCH_DIR SECTIONS SIZEOF STARTUP SYSLIB TARGET Operation provides backward compatibility with GNU R2 0 1 required in that release for naming linker input files inside a directive file Later versions of the linker allow naming input files without using the INPUT directive specifies the available target memory and defines configured and unconfigured memory synonomous to ALIGN names the output file specifies the target 80960 architecture for the current link Overrides G960ARCH and is overridden by the A linker option Default architecture is KB Lets the user specify libraries that are processed immediately before the high level language libraries specified with the HLL directive extends the library search path like L dir defines the contents configuration and location of the output sections returns a section size specifies the first file to be linked specifies the low level support libraries uses the search path to find the specified directive file with the same effect as
182. i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Order Number 485277 007 Revision Revision History Date 001 Original Issue 12 92 002 Minor corrections 09 93 003 Revised for CTOOLS960 R4 5 and GNU 960 R2 4 05 94 004 Revised for R5 0 02 96 005 Revised for R5 1 01 97 006 Revised for R6 0 12 97 007 Revised for R6 5 12 98 In the United States additional copies of this manual or other Intel literature may be obtained by writing Intel Corporation Literature Sales P O Box 5937 Denver CO 80217 9808 Or you can call the following toll free number 1 800 548 4725 In locations outside the United States obtain additional copies of Intel documentation by contacting your local Intel sales office Intel Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document Intel Corporation makes no commitment to update nor to keep current the information contained in this document Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use of any circuitry other than circuitry embodied in an Intel product No other circuit patent licenses are implied Intel software products are copyrighted by and shall remain the property of Intel Corporation Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions stated in Intel s Sof
183. ibility with CTOOLS960 Release 3 5 and later gstrip960 invokes the stripper for backwards compatibility with GNU 960 Release 1 2 and later On Windows hosts the invocation command is gstrip96 option is one or more of the options listed in Table 15 1 Use the options only for stripping COFF or ELF files For b out files specify no options filename is one or more files to be stripped NOTE 7o strip all debugging information for COFF b out or ELF specify no options Also you can interleave the options and filenames in any order 15 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 15 1 To strip a file while preserving and re indexing the relocation entries for incremental linking use the r option Without r the relocation information inhibits the stripper When you use the stripper on an ELF DWARF file all sections that lack the SHF_ALLOc bit in the section header table are removed from the output file The one exception to this rule is the shst rt ab section which is not removed str960 gstrip960 Options Option Effect strips all symbols This is the default b strips the local symbols and line numbers only retaining the block information strips CCINFO only h displays help information and exits Stips line numbers only r strips files containing relocation information revising the remaining relocation indexes External and static symbols remain V displays the stripper version number and the
184. ibx a arc960 d libx a filel o Archiver arc960 gar960 F Library Format Option Specifies the OMF for an empty library F elf coff bout Discussion This option specifies the desired object module format for the empty library Object formats are b out COFF and ELF Example The following example creates an ELF archive with member libx c arc960 r Felf libx a libx c h Help Option Displays help information Discussion To display help information for the archiver use the h option 2 11 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 12 I Local Modifier Places temporary files in the current directory Discussion To put temporary files in the current directory use 1 The archiver selects a temporary working directory as described in Specifying the Object Module Format By default the archiver creates libraries in COFF format However the default is overridden when you e specify a different format with the F option See page 2 10 e specify a object file on the command line that is not in COFF format For example to create an empty archive in COFF format enter the command gar960 u libname a To create an empty library in ELF format use the F option gar960 Felf u libname a However when you instruct the archiver to add a non COFF object file to a new archive the archiver uses the object file s format For example if you enter the command gar96
185. icates the string 9876543210 Substituting Text by Regular Expression Global substitution in a string is done by pat subst patsubst string regexp replacement This searches st ring for matches of regexp and substitutes replacement for each match The syntax for regular expressions is the same as in GNU Emacs Macro Processor mpp960 The parts of st ring that are not covered by any match of regexp are copied to the expansion Whenever a match is found the search proceeds from the end of the match so a character from st ring is never substituted twice If regexp matches a string of zero length the start position for the search is incremented to avoid infinite loops To make a replacement 1 Insert replacement into the expansion 2 Substitute string for s 3 Substitute the text matched by the Mth parenthesized sub expression of regexp 0 being the text the entire regular expression matched for N The replacement argument can be omitted in which case the text matched by regexp is deleted Formatted Output Use format to format output format format string works much like the C function printf The first argument is a format string that can contain specifications and the expansion of format is the formatted string The built in format is modeled after the ANSI C printf function It supports the normal specifiers c s d o x X u e E and f It also supports field widths and precisio
186. ication by having multiple NN TY pairs with the same name in the NN SF2 nl CE n2 n3 n4 F2 Record type nl Type index unique within module gt 255 0 255 reserved for implicit types SCE Record type D 25 D 26 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide n2 DI NA Local name index for symbol defined by NN record Variable number of fields specifying additional type information as defined in Tables D 7 and D 8 Attribute Records ATN Each ATN record is associated with an NN record and defines a valid symbol NN record ATN record ASN record SFO nl Id SF1CE nl nl SFO nl Id SF1 SCE nl n2 n3 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 Id E2 CE n1 h2 NN record type Symbol name NN record type Symbol name ATN record type Symbol name index this must be the same index as specified for the NN record Symbol type index O untyped The numbers representing the attributes the blocks they can appear in and their descriptions are illustrated in Table D 9 Optional features described for each attribute ASN record type Symbol name NN record index Symbol value HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Table D 9 Attribute Numbers Blocks and Descriptions n3 Block Description 1 4 6 3 3 4 6 5 7 5 8 3 10 4 6 19 10 37 38 39 50 51 52 53 54 55 Automatic variable requires an addit
187. ide Module Miscellaneous Records Module miscellaneous records convey information about a program module For high level modules module miscellaneous records appear within a BB3 BE3 scope For assembly modules module miscellaneous records appear within a BB10 BE10 scope The information in a module miscellaneous record applies to the module within whose scope the record is enclosed For example the information in the module miscellaneous record having code 50 compiler Id type checking rules and compilation time applies to the entire module and all objects in the module Multiple miscellaneous records can coexist within the same module scope especially if the records have different classification codes However some module miscellaneous record types e g code 50 allow at most one record of a given classification code within any single program module scope Specific object file readers may impose further restrictions on the position of module miscellaneous records For example if the information in a module miscellaneous record influences the interpretation of the debugging information of other objects in the module scope specific consuming tools may require that the module miscellaneous record occur before any other debug information This is strictly a requirement of the consuming reader tool however and not the object module format Variable Miscellaneous Records The information in a variable miscellaneous record applies t
188. ied with SYSLIB SYSLIB Specifying Low level Libraries The syntax for the directive is SYSLIB libraries libraries is one or more libraries to be linked last Specify multiple libraries by entering more than one SySL1B directive or by entering multiple names separated by commas or spaces You must put parentheses around the filenames The linker follows the search algorithm described in the Search Paths section You can also use an asterisk to instruct the linker to search multiple libraries For example if you specify SYSLIB yourlib the linker searches for yourlib yourlib_b yourlib_p and yourlib_e NO FLOAT Supporting Floating point Operations The syntax for the directive is FLOAT NOFLOAT FLOAT specifies support for floating point operations The linker loads special emulation libraries for the 1960 KA SA Cx Jx Hx and RP processors which have no on chip floating point support For all processors the linker also loads an extended math support library For information on the floating point and math library names see the Directives Reference section A 31 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 32 NOFLOAT indicates no need for floating point operations The linker links the 1ibmstub a rudimentary math library and no emulation libraries NOFLOAT is the default SEARCH_DIR Extending the Search Path To extend the linker search path use SEARCH_DIR SEARCH_DIR path
189. ies For information on linking with libraries see the linker chapter NOTE To ensure correct formatting delete and recreate b out format libraries created with a GNU 960 archiver before Release 1 3 Invocation Invoke the archiver as ao option modifier archive name gar960 arc960 invokes the archiver providing backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 R3 5 or later gar960 invokes the archiver providing backwards compatibility with the GNU 960 R1 2 or later option is one or more options listed in Table 2 1 modifier is one or more modifiers listed in Table 2 2 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 2 Table 2 1 Option d F o 7D B35 archive is the archive filename Unless you specify a complete pathname the archive must be in the current directory names is one or more member or external filenames Note that when you do not specify a filename or use the F option the archiver creates a COFF archive Archiver Options Effect deletes members from the archive specifies the desired object module format for the an empty library Object formats are b out COFF and ELF displays help information moves members to the end of the archive or to the specified position prints members in the archive replaces existing members or adds new members creates or updates library symbol table prints member information or the archive table of contents updates existing member
190. ign Value to Variable W7 ASW7 E2D7 AD Extension Part AS WO Variable Attributes NN SFO Variable Attributes ATN F1CE Variable Values ASN SE2CE Environment Part ASW1 Variable Attributes NN SFO Variable Attributes ATN F1CE Variable Values ASN SE2cE Section Definition Part AS W2 Section Type ST E Section Size ASS E2D3 Section Base Address ASL E2cc AnAoB WNP GD Oo O O 0O C o gt D 10 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D External Part ASW3 Public External Symbol NTI E Variable Attribute ATI F1c9 Variable Values ASI E2C9 Debug Information Definition Part ASW4 Declare Block Beginning BB F8 Declare Type Name filename line numbers function name variable names etc NN SFO Define Type Characteristics TY F2 Variable Attributes ATN F1CE Variable Values ASN SE2CE Declare Block End BE F9 Data Part ASWS5 Current Section SB E5 Current Section PC ASP E2D0 Load Constant MAUs LD ED Repeat Data RE F7 Trailer Part AS W6 Execution Starting Address ASG 2c7 Module End ME E1 Header Part The header part contains information pointing to the location of other parts within the file Module Begin MB The MB record must be the first record in the module SEO Id1 Id2
191. il There are four possible scenarios in which to select code for profiling as shown in Figure 14 4 Three methods for modifying __ prof_start and __prof_end are presented in table 14 5 14 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Figure 14 4 Four Scenarios for Selecting Profiling Regions _ btext _ btext _prof_start _prof_start _prof_end _etext _etext _prof_end _ btext _prof_start _ btext _prof_start _prof_end _etext _etext _prof_end c d Table 14 4 Preferred Methods for Modifying _prof_start and _prof_end Method Works with Figure Region to profile _prof_start _prof_end libhs libixhs 14 4 a Between two selected 1 1 2 addresses 3 e 2 14 4 b Selected address to 1 2 end of text section 14 4 c Beginning of text 3 1 2 section to selected address 14 4 d Entire text section 3 3 14 8 Statistical Profiler ghist960 Table 14 5 Methods of Modifying __prof_start and __ prof_end method 1 description The defsym command line switch can be used to assign values to __prof_start and ___ prof_end The defsym command line switch can be presented to the compiler of linker Symbols must be preceded with an extra underscore i e __ prof_start In the following example code will be profiled between the starting addresses of main and up to the starting address of endapp endapp itself will not be profiled gcc960 defsym __prof_start _main
192. ile creates an empty section allocating no memory but processing contained symbols locates the entry point specifies the value used to fill gaps in an output section specifies sections to be treated as a unit puts a 4 byte word value at the current address allocates memory and locates the output section but copies no data to the output file puts a two byte half word value at the current address Linker Command Language The sample below shows a SECTIONS directive where all text data and bss sections are allocated to DRAM ECTIONS n etext gt dram data gt dram bss gt dram Combining Input Sections Into Output Sections By default the linker combines sections as follows e Combine all input sections of each name together into one output section with the input section name In each output section sequence the input sections in the order encountered in the input files You can build an output section from specific input sections List the input filenames and sections in an output section definition as filename i sections filename is an input filename i sections is One or more input section names separated with commas or spaces You can use the wildcard character for the filename For example text specifies all input file text sections A 11 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Common Sections COMMON The term common sect
193. ile Format CAFF Table C 28 Entries for Structures Unions and Enumerations Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 3 long int x_tagndx tag index 4 5 unused filled with zeros 6 7 unsigned short x_size size of the structure union or numeration 8 17 unused filled with zeros Auxiliary Entry Declaration The C language structure declaration for an auxiliary symbol table entry is given in Example C 10 This declaration can be found in the header file coff h Example C 10 Auxiliary Symbol Table Entry 1i uni AUXILIARY ENTRY FORMAT on auxent struct long x_tagndx str un or enum tag indx union struct unsigned short x_lnno declaration line number unsigned short x_size str union array size x_lnsz long x_fsize size of function x_misc union struct if ISFCN tag or bb long x_lnnoptr ptr to fcn line long x_endndx entry ndx past block end toe fen struct if ISARY up to 4 dimen continued amp C 39 C 40 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Example C 10 Auxiliary Symbol Table Entry continued unsigned short x_dimen DIMNUM x_ary x_fcnary unsigned short x_tvndx transfer vector index not used x_sym union char x_fname AUXFILNMLEN File name for file symbol struct long x_zeroes zero indicating offset valid long x_offset symbol string tabl
194. ince it is expanded otherwise The expansion of undefine is void i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide foo gt foo define foo expansion text gt foo gt expansion text undefine foo gt foo gt foo It is not an error for name to have no macro definition In that case undefine does nothing Renaming Macros It is possible to rename an already defined macro with the built in defn defn name which expands to the quoted definition of name If the argument is not a defined macro the expansion is void If name is a user defined macro the quoted definition is simply the quoted expansion text If name is a built in the expansion is a special token that points to the built in s internal definition This token is meaningful only as the second argument to define and pushdef and is ignored in any other context Its normal use is best understood through an example that shows how to rename undefine to zap define zap defn undefine gt zap undefine gt undefine zap gt undefine zap In this way defn can be used to copy macro definitions and definitions of built in macros Even if the original macro is removed the other name can still be used to access the definition Macro Processor mpp960 Temporarily Redefining Macros It is possible to redefine a macro temporarily reverting to the previous definition a
195. ing to the missing string Omitted optional parameters that follow the last supplied parameter need not be explicitly included in the miscellaneous record For example in the following variable miscellaneous record optional value2 is missing code 99 valuel value2 value3 The miscellaneous record cluster would be represented in this document as follows NN SFO index null_name ATN F1 CE index 00 3F 63 5 ASN SE2 SCE indexXvaluel ASN E2 SCE index 80 ASN SE2 SCE index value3 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format As another special case it is permissible to omit the NN record when a variable miscellaneous directive immediately follows the variable NN ATN ASN that it modifies In this case the variable miscellaneous directive ATNs and ASNs would all use the same NN index as the actual variable NN index ATN index info Original Variable ASN index expression ATN index 0 64 misc_code count Variable Misc Information ASN ATN index Codes for Miscellaneous Records Each module procedure and variable miscellaneous directive is assigned an ID number from a common index pool For example there is only one miscellaneous directive with ID code 1 The first 50 codes 0 49 are reserved for miscellaneous directives in which the assembler needs to correlate the argument information with other debug information Codes greater than 49 are used for
196. ion in the order listed 3 All the object files and libraries listed individually in the directive files in the order listed 4 All the libraries specified with PRE_HLL 5 All the libraries specified with HLL or default libraries in response to HLL 6 All the libraries specified with SYSLIB HLL Specifying High level Libraries The syntax for the directive is HLL libraries libraries is one or more high level support library filenames The parentheses are required If you do not specify libraries the default HLL libraries are used Specify multiple libraries by entering more than one HLL directive or by entering multiple filenames separated by spaces or commas To use the default libraries enter HLL The libraries and search path found by HLL depend on the linker invocation and the output format A g1d960 invocation for COFF treats the HLL arguments the same as the 1 linker option arguments with the search algorithm described in the Search Paths section The default COFF library abbreviations for HLL are e c for the KB and SB architectures e cand fp for the KA SA C series and J series architectures A 29 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Invoking the linker as 1nk960 has the following effect on HLL Any arguments you specify must be the full library filenames The linker uses the search path for 1nk960 invocations as described in the Search Paths section When you speci
197. ion numbers 1 2 and 3 respectively A section number of zero indicates a relocatable external symbol that is undefined in the current file However a multiply defined external symbol i e an uninitialized variable defined outside a function in C has a section number of zero and a positive value which gives the symbol size When files with multiply defined external symbols are combined the linker combines all input symbols into one symbol and assigns the bss section number The size of the combined symbols determines how much memory is allocated and the value becomes the address of the symbol Section Numbers and Storage Classes Symbols with certain storage classes are restricted to certain section numbers This relationship is summarized in Table C 16 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 16 Section Number and Storage Class Storage Class C_AUTO C_EXT C_STAT C_REG C_LABEL C_MOS C_ARG C_STRTAG C_MOU C_UNTAG C_TPDEF C_ENTAG C_MOE C_REGPARM C_FIELD C_BLOCK C_FCN C_EOS C_FILE C_ALIAS Section Number 1 1 0 1 to 077777 1 to 077777 1 1 0 1 to 077777 1 to 077777 1 to 077777 Hexadecimal Value 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0006 0x0008 0x0009 0x000A 0x000B 0x000C 0x000D 0x000F 0x0010 0x0011 0x0012 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 0x0067 0x0069 Symbol Names N_ABS N_ABS N_UNDEF N_SCNUM N_SCNUM N_ABS N_UNDEF N_SCNUM
198. ion of a file The converter takes an input file and creates an output file with one of these conversions big endian byte order to little endian or vice versa e COFF to b out format or vice versa e ELF to b out or vice versa e ELF to COFF or vice versa Or you can instruct the converter to remove relocation and symbolic information to reduce code size of debugged objects Changing the byte order may be necessary for symbolic debugging and for examination with common object format library COFL tools and other utilities In such cases COFF object file byte order may need to match the host system s byte order For example certain debuggers require it as do the tools COFL and cvt960 NOTE The converter does not initialize the space between ELF sections Although this does not affect the validity of the ELF file it can produce unexpected differences between otherwise identical files Use the dumper disassembler gdmp960 dmp960 with the m option to determine the location of these gaps in an object file 3 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 3 2 Invocation Table 3 1 Option b c C Fbout Fcoff Felf help Invoke the cof960 objcopy converter as cof960 i Spice option input output cof960 invokes the converter for backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 R3 5 and later objcopy invokes the converter for backwards compatibility with GNU 960 R1 3 and later option is any option listed i
199. ion refers to global uninitialized variable space The following are examples of common variables int x y 20 With respect to impact on external linkage this term is used exactly as it is in the FORTRAN programming language COMMON symbols are overridden by a larger definition of the same name or by a definition that is initialized For example int x defined in x o double x defined in y o char x a defined in z o would each override each other resulting in a global variable named x that is an initialized character variable To designate an output section for common sections of input files use the common keyword anywhere in an output section definition To include the common symbols from specific input sections use COMMON after the input section statement For example foo 0 COMMON COMMON section from foo o Similarly the wildcard can be used COMMON Place ALL COMMON sections here common tells the linker where to locate variables not assigned to another section It can refer to all such variables or just to the unassigned variables from specific input files You can list the input files in the output symbol table To create a symbol for each input file in an output section specify CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS at the beginning of the output section definition after the opening brace o section addr spec CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS statements Linker Command Language
200. ional field x1 defining the stack offset in minimum address units There is no ASN record Compiler defined static variable There must be an ASN or ASI record specifying the address value External variable definition There is no ASN record Line number requires two extra fields giving the line number and column number Two optional fields x3 and x4 are reserved and should be omitted The line and column number represent the end of a group of one or more lines in a statement A column number of 0 represents the end of the line and reflects the fact that cvt960 cannot get this information from COFF Line numbers do not have to be in ascending order and it is the consuming tool s responsibility to handle numbers that are out of order There must be an ASN record specifying the address Compiler global variable There must be an ASN record specifying the address value Defines a variable name as a locked register requires an extra field x1 to define the index of the register name There is no ASN record Static variable generated by assembler may be global in scope There must be an ASN record specifying the address value There is one required field x1 which indicates the number of elements of type n2 described by the symbol and x2 which is a local global indicator x2 omitted or 0 indicates local x2 1 indicates global See the AD Extension Part section and the Environmental Part section continued
201. ions for the AD Extension Part appear in Table D 5 Attribute Definitions for the AD Extension Part n3 Description 37 Object format version number requires two extra fields x1 and x2 defining the version number and revision level respectively The current HP MRI version supported is 4 0 38 Object format type requires one extra field x1 defining the type 1 Absolute not relinkable 39 Case sensitivity requires one extra field x1 2 Do not change the case of symbols Environmental Part The Environmental Part contains information relating to the host environment where the object module was created It is located after the Header Part and is pointed to by the W1 portion of ASW1 The organization of this part is similar to the AD Extension part described earlier For more information on the syntax of records in the Environmental Part see the HP MRI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics section The ATN records have the following format NN SFO n Id ATN SF1 SCE nl n2 n3 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 Id FO NN record type nl Symbol name NN record type D 16 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Id Symbol name F1CE ATN record type nl Symbol name index must be same index as specified for its associated record n2 Symbol type index 0 unspecified n3 Attribute definition The attribute definitions for the Environmental Part appear in Table D 6 below Table D 6 A
202. iption 0 5 unused filled with zeros 6 7 unsigned short x_size size of structure union and enumeration 8 11 unused filled with zeros 12 15 long int x_endndx index of next entry beyond this structure union or enumeration 16 23 unused filled with zeros End of Structure The auxiliary table entries for the end of structure have the format shown in Table C 23 Table C 23 Table Entries for End of Structure Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 3 long int x_tagndx tag index 4 5 unused filled with zeros 6 7 unsigned short x_size size of union or enumeration 8 23 unused filled with zeros Functions The auxiliary table entries for a function have the format shown in Table C 24 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 24 Table Entries for Function Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 3 long int x_tagndx tag index 4 7 long int x_fsize size of function in bytes 8 11 long int x_Innoptr file pointer to line number 12 15 long int x_endndx the end index for functions points to the symbol table entry for the next function except the last function for the file scope which points at the first static symbol in the file scope 16 23 unsigned short x_tvndx unused filled with zeros Arrays The auxiliary table entries for an array have the format shown in Table C 25 Table C 25 Table Entries for Array Bytes Declaration Name 0 3 long int x_tagndx 4 5 unsig
203. ividually in the invocation in the order appearing on the command line 3 the object files and libraries listed individually in the linker directive files in the order encountered 4 the libraries listed with the HLL directive 5 the libraries listed with the sYysLIB directive i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 12 Specifying Libraries To resolve a library reference list the library after all object files containing the reference Only required library members are linked The libraries are opened and searched once unless you use the c option Specify a library file e with no option using the full filename with its extension e with the 1 option and a standard library filename abbreviation as described in the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 e with the HLL directive for the standard high level support libraries e with the sysL1B directive for the libraries such as low level support libraries to be linked last The following example links the file1 o and file2 o object files The user defined library 1ibu a resolves references in filel o Any unresolved references in file2 o that could be resolved in 1ibu a cause the link to fail 1nk960 filel o lu file2 o Using the c option to perform a circular library search resolves all symbols NOTE The linker searches library names and locations according to the new library installation convention You must upgrade libr
204. ke the section size printer as siz960 ae gsize960 options ilenames siz960 invokes the section size printer for backwards compatibility with CTOOLS960 Release 3 5 and later gsize960 invokes the section size printer for backwards compatibility with GNU 960 Release 2 1 and later options is one or more of the options listed in Table 13 1 filenames is one or more filenames separated with spaces for which the symbol tables are to be displayed You can specify complete pathnames 13 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 13 1 gsize960 siz960 Options Option Effect displays total size of common symbols displays the sizes and addresses in decimal displays help information and exits Includes unallocated sections in the size calculation displays the sizes and addresses in octal Suppresses header display lt DD O 3 73 Aa 0 displays the section size printer version and creation date and continues processing v960 displays the section size printer version and creation date and stops processing x displays the sizes and addresses in hexadecimal By default sizes are displayed in decimal and addresses in hexadecimal For example the following displays the version information and continues processing siz960 test o test o Section Size Address text 52 0x00000000 data 4 0x00000034 bss 0 ox00000038 Total 56 NOTE With release 5 1 the n option includes ELF debug sections in
205. l and Public parts see the HP MRI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics section Public External Symbol NI The Public Symbol provides for Public symbol definition and is optionally included in a module Public symbol indices begin at 32 Indices 0 through 31 are reserved B8 n Id SB8 Record type n Public name index number unique within an object file must be gt 31 0 31 reserved Id Symbol name Attribute Records ATI SFL C9 nl n2 n3 n4 Fic9 ATI record type nl Symbol name index this must be the same index as specified for the M record n2 Symbol type index as follows 0 Unspecified 2 Initialized data byte 5 Initialized data word 7 32 bit double word 10 32 bit floating point 11 64 bit floating point 12 10 or 12 byte floating point 15 Instruction address n3 Attribute definition The attribute definitions are described in Table D 7 D 17 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 7 n4 If n2 is non zero number of elements in the symbol type specified in n2 Attribute Definitions for the External Part n3 Description 19 Static symbol generated by assembler There is an ASI record specifying the address value Value Records ASI The ASI record defines values for variables SE2 C9 nl n2 E2C9 Record type nl Symbol index this must be the same index as specified for the NI record n2 value of symbol Section Part The Section part contains
206. l o la The linker extracts the first member of library 1iba a that defines rout1 With no other references to 1iba a members the linker would link only the member resolving rout 1 7 41 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide M Multiple Definition Warning Included for backwards compatibility No effect Discussion This option is supported for backwards compatibility but has no effect Related Topic t Multiple definition warning m Memory Map Provides a memory map of the linked executable Discussion To write a memory map of the linked executable to stdout specify m which lists e the symbol locations e the global common storage allocation 7 42 Linker Ink960 gld960 For information on stdout see your host system documentation You can redirect map information to a file using the N option Related Topic N Name memory map file N Name Memory Map File Specifies a filename for writing the memory map Nfile Discussion Redirects the linker memory map to the specified file file When this option is not specified but the m option is given map information is written to standard output This option allows you to separate the linker map from other information written to standard output such as verbose messages and warnings Example The following command links t o with verbose messages and redirects the linker map to a file mapfile Verbose messages are still se
207. limiters and newline are used instead of the void arguments The comment delimiters can be of any length The expansion of changecom is void 8 21 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 8 22 Comments are copied to the output much as if they were quoted strings If you want the text inside a comment expanded quote the start comment delimiter Calling changecom without any arguments disables the commenting mechanism completely Saving Input It is possible to save some text until the end of the normal input has been seen Text can be saved to be read again by mpp960 when the normal input has been exhausted This feature is normally used to initiate cleanup actions before normal exit as when deleting temporary files Use the built in mppwrap to save input text mppwrap string This stores string and the rest of the arguments to be reread when end of input is reached The saved input is reread only when the end of normal input is seen but not if mppexit is used to exit mpp960 It is safe to call mppwrap from saved text but then the order in which the saved text is reread is undefined If mppwrap is not used recursively the saved pieces of text are reread in the opposite order in which they were saved LIFO last in first out File Inclusion mpp960 allows you to include named files at any point in the input Including Named Files There are two built in macros in mpp960 for including files
208. lo o Symbols from hello o Name Value Class Type Size Line Section _main O extern ants 16 text _printf 0 extern 5 The following displays the full output nam960 f hello o Symbols from hello o Name Value Class Type Size Line Section hello c file _main O extern EAE oJ 16 text text O Stata 2 3 text data 16 static data bss ale nots con oa bss _printf O0 extern 10 6 Name Lister gnm960 nam960 6 The following sorts the symbols by name nam960 n proto o Symbols from proto o Name Value Class Type Size Line Section _bentime O extern _exit O extern _init_bentime O lextern _is_time 368 extern int 44 text _irand48 O extern _main O extern int 348 text _printf O lextern _scanf O extern _srand48 O extern _watered 416 extern int 36 text _watering 352 extern arg 4 text proto c file 7 The following sorts the symbols by value nam960 v proto o Name Value Class Type Size Line Section proto c file _bentime O extern _exit O extern _init_bentime O lextern _lrand48 O lextern _main O extern int 348 text printf O extern _scanf O extern _srand48 O extern _watering 352 extern arg 4 text _is_time 368 extern int 44 text _watered 416 extern inte 36 text 10 7 ROM Image Builder grom960 grom960 extracts the text executable code and data sections from one or
209. low ELF Binary Representation of NOLOAD DSECT COPY Sections SHF_ALLOC RELOCATED SHT_PROGBITS SIZE HAS_PROGRAM_HDR N NA N S N N NA N 0 N Y Y S Y Y Y Y S Y SHF_ALLOC indicates whether or not the section is allocated memory by the linker It also indicates that the output flag word contains this output flag RELOCATED indicates whether the section is relocated or not Since the DSECT and NOLOAD sections do not have section contents it is not applicable to them Note that the copy sections are not relocated but copyed verbatim Each section contains SHT_PROGBITS Or SHT_NOBITS Y indicates that the section is a SHT_PROGBITS while N indicates it is SHT_NOBITS If size is 0 the output section has zeroed that element s indicates that the section size is retained for your information If the column for HAS_PROGRAM_HDR contains a y the section should be loaded by a memory loader utility Linker Command Language FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION Allocating Space for Common Symbols To assign common symbol space in the output data use FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION This directive has the same effect as the a option You can use FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION when generating either relocatable or non relocatable linked files However this feature is most useful when using relocatable links DEFINED Finding Symbols To determine whether a global symbol is defined use DEFINED DEFINED symbol
210. lows only for printable strings This implementation allows for non printable strings An extension byte allows for more than 127 characters If the reader encounters a DE character the next one byte is the string length The one byte length allows strings from 0 to 255 characters If the reader encounters a DF character the next two bytes are the string length The two byte string allows 0 to 65535 characters Information Variables Information variables convey information to a symbolic debugger or linker about various constructs within the program The information conveyed relates to symbols section addresses and lengths starting addresses and current PC value These are represented by an alphabetic letter optionally followed by a number G Execution starting address In Address of public symbol n Nn Address of local symbol n Pn The program counter for section n implicitly changes with each LR LD or LT that applies to section n in the Data part Sn The size in minimum address units MAUs of a section n Wn nis 0 through 7 Wn is the file offset in bytes of the n th part of the object file from the beginning of the file The number if present for symbol definitions identifies which of several variables of the same type is referenced This number is referred to as an index in the discussion that follows There are 3 different series of indices external reference indices section indices and public name type local name in
211. mas oo 2a18 10776 25030 b o HDR Ox3c 60 Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 b o 0x253c 9532 c o HDR Ox3c 60 c o Ox7b74 31604 END OF FILE 0x0 0 t 2a54 t 4 90 t 4fcc t cb40 t cb40 10836 20368 20428 52032 52032 25124 47620 47714 145500 145500 The t option of the dumper permits dumping of the archive symbol list information For example the command gdmp960 t lib a produces the output Name _dwarf_init _dwarf_tag __dw_build_a_die __dw_build_tree dw_build_cu_list Offset 168 10776 20368 20368 20368 Filename w w ag 0 Oo 0 6 13 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 6 14 Dumping the Contents of Archive Members The dumper lets you disassemble or display information about a file within an archive by using the e and o options in combination with other command line switches In the example below the e option applies all command line options to each member of an archive gdmp960 q e lib a asok File OMF Host Byte Order Target Byte Order b o File OMF Host Byte Order Target Byte Order CLO File OMF Host Byte Order Target Byte Order a o elf big little b o elf big little CiO elf big little Dumper Disassembler dmp960 gdmp960 The example below shows how the o option lets you apply all command line options to the named obje
212. mber header Example C 11 Archive Member Headers define ARFMAG n header trailer string struct ar_hdr member header char ar_name 16 terminated member name char ar_date 12 member date char ar_uid 6 member user id char ar_gid 6 member group id char ar_mode 8 member mode octal char ar_size 10 member size char ar_fmag 2 header trailer string Numeric information in the member header is stored in decimal format except for ar_mode which is formatted in octal You can look at the information stored in the member headers of an archive by using the archiver s table of contents control with the verbose modifier on the command line Table C 29 lists archive member headers their sizes and their contents C 45 C 46 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 29 Size and Contents of Archive Member Headers Bytes 0 15 16 27 28 33 34 39 40 47 48 57 58 59 Field ar_name ar_date ar_uid ar_gid ar_mode ar_size ar_fmag Contents field contains the name of the member padded with a slash followed by blanks The archiver derives this name from the pathname of the external file when it adds the member to the archive The member name cannot be changed although the member may be replaced deleted or moved within the archive field shows the date and time of the external file when initially archive
213. miscellaneous directives where the assembler only needs to encode the parameters of the miscellaneous directive into the relocatable object module Policies for Adding and Modifying Miscellaneous Records Adding new miscellaneous records to the object module format is straightforward but requires agreement between the producers and consumers of the miscellaneous information To supplement the debugging information for some program object the compiler designer need only agree with the consumer tool designer on the miscellaneous record classification code to identify the new information category and output the appropriate miscellaneous record and parameters using the general rules described below D 43 D 44 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Clearly even when there is agreement between producers and consumers of IEEE 695 object modules wholesale modification of existing miscellaneous records is undesirable because older versions of object module reader tools can become confused by the new record syntax and the backward compatibility of new object files with older consumer tools could suffer Policies for Generating and Reading Miscellaneous Records The following policies are set forth to ensure that miscellaneous information records are created modified and consumed in an orderly manner 1 For object module producers Adding new required fields to an existing miscellaneous record is prohibited Adding new
214. mmediately after a successful call to ldtbread to retrieve the name associated with the new symbol table entry Finding Information in Object Files Idiread Idlinit Idlitem Locates and reads the function line number entries include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldlread ldptr DFILE ldptr fcnindx fecnindx linenum long unsigned short linenum LINENO linent int ldlinit ldptr DFILE ldptr long fcnindx fcnindx int ldlitem ldptr DFILE ldptr unsigned short linenum LINENO linent linenum linent Discussion To locate and read line number entries linent locates and reads a line number entry for the function specified by the cindex symbol table ldlread entry ldlinit function ldlitem current function locates the line number entries for the specified locates and reads a line number entry for the B 8 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Using 1dlinit followed by 1dlitem is the same as using 1dlread alone You can find the beginning of a series of line number entries with ldlinit or 1dlread then use 1dlitem to retrieve the subsequent entries in the same function For line number entries in a different function call ldlinit or 1dlread with a different fcindex You need not know an exact line number when calling 1dlread or ldlitem Both functions read the entry with the smallest line number equal to or gr
215. mmon Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 4 Execution File Header Declaration The execution file header is the first data structure in the optional file header that immediately follows the required header information See Table C 1 for the location and size of execution information in the file header The C language structure declaration for the i960 processor executable a out file header is in the coff h header file Refer to Table C 4 for the declaration s fields Standard Output a out File Header Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 1 short f_magic magic number 2 3 short vstamp version stamp 4 7 unsigned long tsize text size in bytes padded to full word boundary 8 11 unsigned long dsize initialized data size 12 15 unsigned long bsize uninitialized data size 16 19 unsigned long entry entry point 20 23 unsigned long __ text_start base of text for this file 24 27 unsigned long _ data_start base of data for this file 28 31 unsigned long tagentries number of tag entries to follow The tagent ries field is always zero because none of Intel s development tools use tag entries Section Headers A table of section headers specifies the layout of data within the file Table C 5 shows the section header format The size of a section is padded to a multiple of 4 bytes C 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 5 Section Header Contents Bytes Decl
216. mory than is actually contained in your system causes a fatal error For more information on assigning sections and groups to memory regions see the SECTIONS Defining Output Sections section Examples 1 The following example prevents any code from being located in the first 0x10000 words of memory MEMORY valid org 0x10000 len Oxffff0000 2 In the following example the largest configured region is 0x10000 bytes MEMORY meml o 0x00000 1 0x02000 mem2 0x40000 1 0x05000 mem3 o 0x20000 1 0x10000 Default Linker Allocation The term allocation refers to the process the linker uses to locate input sections into output sections and then to assign the output sections to actual memory addresses A 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 8 Omitting a SECTIONS directive puts all input sections with the same name in an output section of that name in the order shown below For example linking several object files each containing the text data mysect and bss input sections creates the combined text data mysect and bss output sections The linker allocates the output sections in the following order when a SECTIONS directive is not supplied e text at the lowest available address e other text type sections after text e the data section after all the text type sections e other data type sections after data e other types of sections after all the text
217. mula heap_size prof_start int prof_end bucket_size sizeof NOTE Changing this parameter directly affects heap space requirements See _heap_size for details Effect Number of text space bytes per bucket Timer interrupt frequency Expressed in the number of times to sample in one second The low address in the range of instruction addresses to profile The high address in the range of instruction addresses to profile supplied NOTE There are no default values for libixhs All values must be 14 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Bucket Size __buck_size The bucket size determines the granularity of measurement A hit counter is allocated on the application s heap for each bucket so smaller bucket sizes translate into more heap memory usage but better measuring accuracy In reality a bucket may cross function boundaries as shown in figure 14 3b Situation b occurs more often than situation a When the IP shown in figure 14 3b is sampled the hit counter for bucket bO will be incremented Ghist960 will report a result that makes function f1 look like it has received more IP hits because the counter is associated with the first line of code For libixhs the bucket size must be a power of 2 and larger than 4 Figure 14 3 Buckets Crossing Function Boundaries func bucket func bucket _prof_start fl bl fl bO rof_end cies 3 3 a b 14
218. n e applies all options on the command line e g r f to each member of an archive m displays a map of the archive contents See the first example later in this section 0 filename applies all command line options to the named archive member file only p suppresses headers q queries the archive file and displays its object module format and host byte order St displays the archive symbol list Indicates a new dumper option i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 6 12 Displaying Archive Structure Information The examples that follow show an archive file 1ib a that contains the object files a o b o and c o in that order This first set of examples show how the dumper can display information on the structure of an archive file using the q m and t options This example demonstrates the behavior of the dumper when querying an archive file for its type The command gdmp960 q lib a produces the output File lib a OMF elf archive Host Byte Order big Target Byte Order unknown In the next example the dumper maps the internal structure of an archive file The command gdmp960 m lib a produces the following output HEX DEC OCT EU E NE t 0 0 0 Magic String 0x8 8 7ER 8 8 10 Symbol List HDR Ox3c 60 44 68 104 Symbol List 0x64 100 a8 168 250 a o HDR Ox3c 60 Sonos e4 228 344 a o 0x2934 10548
219. n Table 3 1 input is the input file output names the output file Without an output filename specification the converter overwrites the input file cof960 objcopy Options Effect generates big endian output regardless of the input byte order copies the file rather than moving it strips CCINFO from output specifies the output format regardless of the input format e Fbout generates b out format output e Fcoff generates COFF output e Felf generates ELF output Omitting F leaves the format unchanged Changing the file format removes the relocation information and symbol table generates an output byte order matching the host system byte order regardless of the input byte order displays help information and exits continued amp COFF ELF b out Converter cof960 objcopy Table 3 1 cof960 objcopy Options continued Option Effect J Compresses the symbol table merges duplicate tags and compresses the string Qa To sa table COFF files only generates little endian output regardless of the input byte order overwrites the input files with the converted output suppresses printing status information during conversion converts little endian input to big endian output Using r with big endian input Causes an error removes all relocation and symbol table information Do not use S when converting a library or other relocatable files as it renders the files useless displays progress information d
220. n the invocation or supply the a directives interactively after entering the rom960 command To end an interactive session type exit quit Ctrl z in Windows or Ctrl a on UNIX at the rommer prompt Directive Files The rommer directive filename must have a 1d extension When you run the rommer you specify the base filename without the 1d extension Table 12 1 lists the rommer directives For information on using the directives see the Directive Reference section 12 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 12 4 Table 12 1 rom960 Directives Directive checksum help ihex map mkfill mkimage move patch permute rom sh split Operation computes and stores a checksum Displays help information and exits translates an image to an Intel hexadecimal format reports the section addresses section sizes and the image file size to stdout translates a COFF executable file into a memory image containing an image of the program as it would appear when downloaded creates an image of the executed file rearranges the sections changes the image contents rearranges the address permute_a or data permute_d bits specifies the address space length and width executes a host system command splits one image into smaller images of the specified size ROM Image Builder rom960 You can put rommer directives in your linker directive files e Use only lowercase letters for the
221. name xfake where x is an integer greater than zero Several unnamed items are tagged consecutively as follows lfake 2fake 3fake 11lfake 12fake etc For each section the assembler creates it generates a symbol table entry in which bit 0x200 in the symbol flags field is set This creates a signature recognized by the tools that process COFF files The linker does not generate symbols for the sections it creates Symbol Name The symbol name structure is actually a union declared like this union char n_name 8 struct string_table_pointer long n_zeroes long n_offset If a symbol name is less than eight characters long it is stored in n_name padded if necessary with nulls If the symbol name is longer than 8 characters n_zeroes is set to 0 and n_offset is set to the offset into the string table at which the symbol name is stored Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 11 Symbol Name Field Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 7 char n_name null padded symbol name 0 3 long_int n_zeros zero in this field indicates that the name is in the string table 4 7 long_int n_offset offset of the name in the string table Storage Classes Storage class is associated with each symbol by the compiler or assembler and stored in the n_sclass field However the following are used only externally C_EFCN C_EXTDEF C_ULABEL C_USTATIC and C_LINE
222. ned short x_Inno 6 7 unsigned short x_size 8 9 unsigned short x_dimen 0 10 11 unsigned short x_dimen 1 12 13 unsigned short x_dimen 2 14 15 unsigned short x_dimen 3 16 23 Description tag index line number of declaration size of array first dimension second dimension third dimension fourth dimension unused filled with zeros C 37 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide End of Blocks and Functions The auxiliary table entries for the ends of blocks and functions have the format shown in Table C 26 Table C 26 End of Block and Function Entries Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 3 unused filled with zeros 4 5 unsigned short x_Inno number of lines in block 6 23 unused filled with zeros Beginning of Blocks and Functions The auxiliary table entries for the beginning of blocks and functions have the format shown in Table C 27 Table C 27 Beginning of Block and Function Entries Bytes Declaration Name Description 0 3 unused filled with zeros 4 5 unsigned short x_Inno line number in source where function begins 6 11 unused filled with zeros 12 15 long int x_endndx index of next entry past this block 16 17 2 gt unused filled with zeros Names Related to Structures Unions and Enumerations The auxiliary table entries for structure union and enumerations symbols have the format shown in Table C 28 Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive F
223. nes can have two entry points The address of the first the ca11 entry is given as the value of the routine name and supports access via a ca11 instruction The address of the second is contained in the second auxiliary entry C 25 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 14 The C_LEAFSTAT storage class also is associated with routines to be called with bal but the assembler optimizes the functions instead of the linker because the routine is of source module scope Symbol Value Field The value of a symbol depends on its storage class This relationship is summarized in Table C 14 Symbol Value Field Storage Decimal Hexadecimal Class Value Value Argument Value C_AUTO 1 0x0001 frame pointer offset in bytes C_EXT 2 0x0002 relocatable C_STAT 3 0x0003 relocatable address C_REG 4 0x0004 register number r0 0 r15 15 gO 16 g15 31 C_LABEL 6 0x0006 relocatable address C_MOS 7 0x0008 offset in bytes C_ARG 8 0x0009 argument block offset C_STRTAG 9 0x000A zero C_MOU 11 0x000B zero C_UNTAG 12 0x000C zero C_TPDEF 13 0x000D zero C_ENTAG 15 Ox000F zero C_MOE 16 0x0010 enumeration value C_REGPARM 17 0x0011 register number r0 O r15 15 gO 16 g15 31 C_FIELD 18 0x0012 bit displacement C_AUTOARG 19 0x0013 frame pointer offset in bytes continued amp Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 14 Symbol Value Field continued
224. nes how much of the binary file is overwritten Example The following overwrites code in the pat file file with the contents of the newbyte file beginning at address 1000 of pat file move hello mkimage hello patfile patch patfile newbyte 1000 Related Topic mkimage ROM Image Builder rom960 permute Rearranges the data or addresses in a binary file permute a infile order outfile permute d infile order outfile infile is the binary filename to be permuted order is a series of integers separated by spaces indicating the order of the bits to be permuted out file is the name of the file containing the permuted image Discussion Rearrange the address bits or the data bits in a ROM image as follows To reorder data bits use permute d Bits are repositioned within data items that are the width of the ROM image Specify the output bit location for each input bit from the least significant to the most significant input bit To reorder address bits use permute a Bits are repositioned within 32 bit addresses Specify the new bit location for each address bit from least to most significant input bit In interactive mode the rommer prompts for the new location of each bit Use permute a or permute d after a rom command describing the target ROM configuration The permute a command uses the length and width specifications from the rom command to define the working address space 12 17 i960 Proce
225. ns 7 26 9 1 gmung960 Options weit esteccteh ot etcetera eee 9 2 10 1 gnm960 nam960 Options eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 3 10 2 Section COdES vecsiiscseis cesieonckienparcees sedans ieneebmetindenkiente 10 4 11 1 grom960 OPuOnS 2 dccicctticteeniec tea edaues watehwnbsiue eateles 11 2 11 2 Section Specifications eee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 3 12 1 rom960 Directives eeeccecceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeees 12 4 13 1 gsize960 siZ960 Options ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 13 2 14 1 Terminology sites 2isetere cehcnatetetadia nied Gncdiveee a 14 2 14 2 MON960 Library Parameters ceeeeeeeeeeees 14 4 14 3 IxWorks Library Parameters cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 5 14 4 Preferred Methods for Modifying _prof_start and prof end sanani oc a tesa te ecce tarde eae tecatae ise 14 8 14 5 Methods of Modifying _prof_start ENG prof endyen E A EE EE RERE 14 9 14 6 Required Resources ccccceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeetsneeeeeeeees 14 11 14 7 GIST OPUONS si eet etetnedeule i aateadekeeds obennies 14 13 14 8 Procedure for Profiling Under MON960 and IxWorks 14 14 14 9 File Formats Generated by the ghist960 Library 14 15 14 10 Binary Data Format ciiaccienihe dees Qe ieee 14 16 14 11 ASCII File Format ccccccceeeeeessseeeceeeeeeeeeeseesneeees 14 16 14 12 Examples ParameterS cccccccseseceeeeeeeeeteeeeteees 14 18 15 1 str960 gstrip960 Options ccc eeeeessseeet
226. ns and the modifiers 0 h and 1 For more details on printf see C A Reference Manual 8 29 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Macros for Doing Arithmetic Integer arithmetic using a C like syntax is included There are built in macros for simple increment and decrement operations Decrement and Increment Operators The built ins incr and decr support the increment and decrement of integers incr number decr number which expand to the numerical value of number incremented or decremented respectively by one Evaluating Integer Expressions Use eval to evaluate integer expressions eval expression radix width expands to the value of expression Expressions can contain the following operators listed in order of decreasing precedence Unary minus Exponentiation Multiplication division and modulo Addition and subtraction hit eer eX Relational operators Logical negation amp Bitwise and Bitwise or amp amp Logical and Logical or Macro Processor mpp960 3 Bitwise exclusive or All operators except exponentiation are left associative Numbers can be given in decimal octal starting with 0 or hexadecimal starting with 0x Parentheses may be used to group subexpressions whenever needed For the relational operators a true relation returns 1 and a false relation returns 0 eval does not handle macro names even if they expand to
227. nt to standard output 1nk960 m Nmapfile t o v Related Topic m Memory map 7 43 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide n Noinhibit Output Writes an output file regardless of errors Discussion To produce an output file even when the linker encounters non fatal errors specify n By default any error suppresses the output file Example The following command produces an output file named haserr o regardless of non fatal errors 1nk960 n proto o ohaserr o O Optimization of Calls Inhibited Inhibits branch and link or system call optimizations O b s b inhibits the replacement of cal1j and calljx pseudo operations with branch and link instructions s inhibits the replacement of cal1j and calljx pseudo operations with system call instructions call instructions remain 7 44 Linker Ink960 gld960 Discussion To inhibit branch and link optimizations specify ob To inhibit system call optimizations specify os By default the linker performs both types of call optimization Note that if a function declared with pragma systemproc lacks a function definition os causes the linker to issue a fatal error Example The following command inhibits system call optimizations but allows branch and link optimizations 1nk960 Os proto o o Output Filename Names the output object file ofilename filename names the output file You can include a full or partial pa
228. nts in macro calls 8 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 8 4 v960 B S T Generates synchronization lines for use by the C preprocessor or other similar tools This is useful for example when mpp960 is used as a front end to a compiler Source filename and line number information is conveyed by lines of the form line linenum filename that are inserted as needed into the middle of the input but always on complete lines by themselves Such lines mean that the following line originated or was expanded from the contents of input file filename at line linenum filename may be omitted when the filename did not change from the previous synchronization line Displays the version number of the program Displays the version number and exits Provides for compatibility with UNIX System V m4 but these options do nothing in this implementation Macro definitions and deletions can be made on the command line by using the D and u options They have the following format Dname value Uname tname Enters name into the symbol table before any input files are read When value is missing the value is taken to be the empty string The value can be any string and the macro can be defined to take arguments just as if defined from within the input Deletes any predefined meaning name might have Only predefined macros can be deleted in this way Enters name into the symbol table as undefined but trac
229. o Arguments A name that has a macro definition is expanded as a macro If the name is followed by an opening parenthesis the arguments are collected before the macro is called If too few arguments are supplied the missing arguments are taken to be the empty string If there are too many arguments the excess arguments are ignored Normally mpp960 issues warnings when a built in macro is called with an inappropriate number of arguments but it can be suppressed with the o command line option For user defined macros there is no check of the number of arguments given Macros are expanded normally during argument collection and whatever commas quotes and parentheses that might show up in the resulting expanded text defines the arguments as well Thus if foo expands to b c the macro call bar a foo d is a macro call with four arguments a b c and d Quoting Macro Arguments Each argument has leading unquoted white space removed Within each argument all unquoted parentheses must match For example if foo is a macro FOOL EEEE S is a macro call with one argument whose value is 0 6 8 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 8 8 It is common practice to quote all arguments to macros unless you are sure you want the arguments expanded To use this convention you would change the above command to foo C Macro Expansion When any arguments to a macro call have been collected th
230. o mpp960 or with the built in macro debugfile debugfile filename sends all further debug and trace output to filename If filename is empty debug and trace output are discarded If debugfile is called without any arguments debug and trace output are sent to the standard error output Input Control This section describes various built in macros for controlling the input to mpp960 Deleting Whitespace in Input The built in dni reads and discards all characters up to and including the first newline dnl It is often used in connection with define to remove the newline that follows the call to define Thus define foo Macro foo dnl A very simple macro indeed foo gt Macro foo i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The input up to and including the next newline is discarded Usually an1 is immediately followed by an end of line or some other white space mpp960 produces a warning diagnostic if dn1 is followed by an open parenthesis In this case dni collects and processes all arguments looking for a matching close parenthesis All predictable side effects resulting from this collection take place an1 returns no output The input following the matching close parenthesis up to and including the next newline on whatever line containing it is still discarded Changing the Quote Characters The default quote delimiters can be changed with the built in changequote changequote
231. o the most recent data object declared using a normal NN ATN ASN cluster as described in Chapter 3 For example variable miscellaneous code defines the register shadowing parameters for the specific data object immediately preceding the variable miscellaneous record HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Procedure Miscellaneous Records The information in a procedure miscellaneous record applies to the entire code block within whose scope the record is enclosed The traditional scope for a procedure miscellaneous record has been a procedure or function code block that is BB4 BE4 or BB6 BE6 For example procedure miscellaneous code 1 conveys the address of the exit return instruction of a procedure However in anticipation of supporting future lexical features such as Ada tasks and package scopes and to limit the proliferation of terminology associated with decoration of code blocks the definition of the enclosing scope for a procedure miscellaneous record is broadened to include other kinds of code blocks some of which are yet to be defined There is no ambiguity regarding the scope of each procedure miscellaneous record because the relevant enclosing scope had to have been agreed to both by the producer and consumer of the procedure miscellaneous information when the classification number was assigned Thus by definition each procedure miscellaneous record s classification number also implies the record s relevant code block
232. object file is linked At the time it either points to the file header for the next file in the chain or the start of the global storage area Each file entry generates one two or three auxiliary table entries The first entry lists the name provided with the file directive If the program is a compiled source file the second entry contains the ident information from the compiler such as the compiler s name and version with the present date and time The third entry contains the assembler information such as assembler identity and version NOTE All entry information is controlled by the environment variable I960IDENT If the 1960IDENT variable is not set the assembler generates no ident entries If the source file is an assembly file the second auxiliary table entry contains the assembler information and the symbol table contains no third entry Sections The auxiliary table entries for a section have the format shown in Table C 21 Format for Auxiliary Table Entries Bytes Declaration Name 0 3 long int x_scnlen 4 5 unsigned short x_nreloc 6 7 unsigned short x_nlinno 8 23 Description section length number of relocation entries number of line numbers unused filled with zeros C 35 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Tag Names The auxiliary table entries for a tag name have the format shown in Table C 22 Table C 22 Tag Name Entries Bytes Declaration Name Descr
233. ocessor Software Utilities User s Guide The 1dahread function returns SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h FAILURE indicates either TYPE ldptr does not represent an archive file e The ldahread function cannot read the archive header Idclose Idaclose Closes an object file or an archive member include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldclose ldptr DFILE ldptr int ldaclose ldptr DFILE ldptr Discussion For uniform access to both object files and archive members use ldclose for files opened with 1dopen ldaclose for files opened with 1daopen To close an archive member keeping the archive open use 1dclose The ldclose function returns SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h FAILURE when TYPE ldptr represents an archive file and the archive contains more members The ldclose function sets the offset of 1dptr to the next member file address and prepares 1dptr for a subsequent 1dopen call B 4 Finding Information in Object Files SUCCESS when the archive contains no more members or when TYPE ldptr represents an individual object file To close an archive or object file regardless of the TYPE ldptr use ldaclose The ldaclose function e closes the file e frees the memory allocated to the LDFILE structure associated with ldptr e returns SUCCESS Idfhread Reads the file header include lt stdio h gt incl
234. odules The converter does not translate archives or relocatable objects Unreferenced Types The converter does not produce type definitions for high level types that are not referenced This omission helps to reduce the size of the TEEE 695 module where the C include mechanism has produced a large number of unreferenced type definitions such as structure tags Global Uninitialized Symbols With IEEE 695 every symbol is owned by some source module The structure of the COFF symbol table however dictates that symbols for global uninitialized variables belong to no specific source module In order to translate COFF global variables the converter produces a module in bss Strictly for symbols that are not accounted for in any other module This module is named global_non_init A single module section is produced for global_non_init which extends from the lowest addressed symbol in the module to the end of the bss section i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 4 4 Compilation Assembly Information COFF does not include source file path information and the compiler and assembler tools before V3 0 do not supply the time of compilation and assembly for source modules The converter does not supply this information COFF Line Numbers COFF does not provide column information for source coordinates and the converter does not provide that information Column numbers in the TEEE 695 output module are 0 The convert
235. of the NOLOAD DSECT and Copy sections are detailed in the table below COFF Binary Representation of NOLOAD DSECT COPY Sections ALLOC RELOCATED scnptr size flags LOADED N NA 0 S NOLOAD N N NA 0 0 DSECT N N S S COPY Y Y Y S S 0 Y The aLoc column indicates whether or not the linker allocates memory for it RELOCATED indicates whether the section is relocated or not Since the DSECT and NOLOAD sections do not have section contents it is not applicable to them Note that the copy sections are not relocated but copyed verbatim If scnptr is 0 in COFF there are no section contents for it even if there is size of the section s indicates that the scnptr corresponds to the file seek address of the section contents See Appendix C for information on the the COFF OMF If size is 0 the output section for that element is fillied with zeros s indicates that the section size is retained for your information A 23 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 24 Table A 6 NOLOAD DSECT COPY ORDINARY Some of the sections set some special flags into the section s flagword The table above indicates which flags are set A loader can load anything from the OMF file but according to the semantics defined here the loader loads only those marked with a y in the table above ELF Binary Representations The ELF binary representations of the NOLOAD DSECT and copy sections are detailed in the table be
236. ointer to extended precision floating point reserved for future use Default Type Name unsigned short int signed long unsigned long float double long double see note 1 instruction address UNKNOWN TYPE void signed char unsigned char signed short int unsigned short int signed long unsigned long float double long double see note 1 D 9 D i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Object File Components An object file is divided into seven component parts Each part is a contiguous group of bytes within the file The component parts may occur in any order within the file with the exception that the Header must occur first and the Module End must occur last The Header part contains information pointing to the location of the other parts within the file Therefore the various file parts do not necessarily have to be read in the order in which they appear The component parts listed below are described in the following sections Header Part Module Beginning MB E0 Address Descriptor AD EC Assign Value to Variable WO ASWO E2D70 Assign Value to Variable WI ASW1 2D70 Assign Value to Variable W2 ASW2 E2D7 Assign Value to Variable W3 ASW3 E2D7 Assign Value to Variable W4 ASW4 E2D7 Assign Value to Variable W5 ASWS E2D7 Assign Value to Variable W6 ASW6 E2D7 Ass
237. ol type in the high level language source code Table D 2 shows what parameters are used to define the type where these parameters appear in the IEEE and the NN and TY records which define the type Table D 2 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Representation of High level Types Definition Type parameters IEEE Record Field Unknown type sized type name NN Id Mnemonic 21 TY n3 size in MAUs TY n4 generalized C language enum tag name NN Id continued amp i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table D 2 continued HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Representation of High level Types Definition enumeration Mnemonic N 32 bit pointer to another type Mnemonic P pointer data structure Mnemonic S structure union of members Mnemonic U union D 6 Type parameters N 4E 0 size of enumeration in MAUs 1st enum constant name 1st enum constant value additional names values name or null name P 50 type index of pointer target structure tag name S 53 size of structure in MAUs member 1 name member 1 type index member 1 MAU offset member 2 name member 2 type index member 2 MAU offset additional members union tag name U 55 size of union in MAUs member 1 name member 1 type index member 1 MAU offset member 2 name member 2 type index member 2 MAU offset additional members IEEE Record Field TY n3 TY n4 TY n5 TY n6 TY n7
238. on o section addr spec statements fil1 mem spec The phrase fi11 designates the fill value for the o sect ion output section For one two or four byte gaps use the initialization keywords BYTE expr SHORT expr LONG expr expr is a byte half word or word value respectively For any value that is longer than the keyword requires the linker uses the least significant byte half word or word i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The location counter within an output section definition is an offset relative to the base address of the output section Any address or alignment you specify is relative to the beginning of the output section To find or specify the location counter absolutely specify the base address by explicitly locating the output section as described in the Locating the Output Sections gt region ALIGN GROUP section Examples 1 The following puts two gaps in the out sec output section A 0x1000 byte gap is left at the beginning of the out sec output section The f1 0 text input section begins after the gap The 2 0 text input section begins at 0x100 bytes after the end of f1 0 text The 3 0 text input section begins on the next word boundary with respect to the beginning of out sec The gaps are filled with the two byte value 0x0020 SECTIONS outsec 0x1000 fl o text 0x100 f2 o text ALIGN 4 3 0 text
239. ong 3 The following shows data moved to a location that is again immediately after text producing a smaller image size move a out map a out Section name Physical address Size text 0 0x5b90 data 0x5b90 0x938 bss 0x60000000 0x118c Image made from a out will be 25800 decimal bytes long Related Topic move 12 11 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide mkfill Translates a COFF file into a memory image mkfill object input image output fill character object input image output fill character Discussion This command translates a COFF executable file into a memory image containing an image of the program as it would appear when downloaded mkimage Creates an executable image mkimage infile image sectionl section2 infile is the object filename image is the converted image filename section is the name of the section in the infile to be converted into the image 12 12 ROM Image Builder rom960 Discussion This option translates a file into a memory image for downloading or burning into ROMs or PROMs This directive puts only the raw data of text type and data type sections in the image without the bss type section and pads any space between the sections with Oxff By default all text and data sections are translated However you may specify sections to translate in the mkimage command The text type and data type section addresses determine the size of
240. optional fields to an existing miscellaneous record is permissible only if a the new information is related to the information already in the record and b the new information does not alter in any way the interpretation of the information already in the record If the new information violates any of these conditions the new information should go into a new miscellaneous record classification 2 For object module consumers When a miscellaneous record having an unknown classification is encountered the object file reader should first consult the version number of the object module format in the ATN code 37 record of the Environment Part see Chapter 3 If the object module version is newer than the reader was designed to consume the reader should provide an indication to the user to this effect Readers might then either a continue reading the object file simply ignoring the information or b abort reading the object file with a message that continuing would result in potentially ignoring important information about symbols in the object module If behavior b is implemented the reader might be designed so that the user can force it to read the object file anyway thereby allowing the user to get some benefit from the object file while being fully aware of the consequences of ignoring some information HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format When a miscellaneous record having an unexpected optional parameter is encountered the situ
241. or family has no BCD float support i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 4 8 IEEE 695 Converter Warning Messages The warning messages appear on stderr After a warning the translation completes but the output can be unusable No public debug info produced no file symbols in COFF symbol table The converter must find at least one file symbol in the COFF symbol table to establish a starting point for translation When no such symbol is found the IEEE 695 public and debug parts are not included in the output module COFF section id number is type COPY symbol data conflicts possible in output The converter found a copy section in the COFF file The IEEE 695 format has no direct analog of a copy section so the conversion could confuse the user COFF section id number is type DSECT symbol conflicts possible in output The converter issues this message because some linkages may produce symbol tables where two or more symbols point to the same memory Some emulators cannot handle this and reject loading such files The converter gives you this information here to prevent your waiting until an emulator fails to load the files Illegal register value number at symbol index number The value of the COFF symbol at the indicated index does not represent an i960 processor register The IEEE 695 translation contains an invalid i960 processor register index COFF argument symbol at index number is ignored addressing
242. ort Name f_magic f_nscns f_timdat f_symptr f_nsyms f_opthdr f_flags Description file type number number of section headers equals the number of sections time and date stamp indicating when the file was created relative to the number of elapsed seconds since 00 00 00 GMT January 1 1970 file pointer containing the starting address of the symbol table number of entries in the symbol table number of bytes in the optional header flags File Header Declaration The C structure declaration for the file header is in the coffcoff h header file Example C 1 shows the declaration format Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Example C 1 File Header Declaration Table C 2 struct filehdr unsigned short f_magic magic number unsigned short f_nscns number of section long f_timdat and date stamp long f_symptr ptr to symbol table long f_nsyms number entries in symbol table unsigned short f_opthdr size of optional header unsigned short f_flags flags define FILHDR struct filehdr define FILHSZ sizeof FILHDR File Header Flags The file header flags describe the type of the object file Table C 2 provides definitions of the flags File Header Flags Mnemonic Definition F_RELFLG indicates whether relocation information was stripped out F_EXEC set if the file is executable and has no unresolved ext
243. ot ensure that the file is a COFF file or an archived object file idrseek Idnrseek Seeks to the file section relocation entries include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldrseek ldptr sectindx DFILE ldptr unsigned short sectindx int ldnrseek ldptr sectname DFILE ldptr char sectname Discussion The ldrseek function seeks to the relocation entries of the section specified by the sect indx of the COFF file associated with 1dptr The ldnrseek function seeks to the relocation entries of the section specified by sectname Finding Information in Object Files The ldrseek and ldnrseek functions return SUCCESS or FAILURE as defined in 1dfcn h e The idrseek function fails when sect indx is greater than the number of sections in the object file e The idnrseek function fails when no section name corresponds with sectname e Either function fails when the specified section has no relocation entries or when the function cannot seek to the specified relocation entries The first section index is 1 Idshread Idnshread Reads an indexed or named file section header include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldshread ldptr sectindx secthead LDFILE ldptr unsigned short sectindx SCNHDR secthead int ldnshread ldptr sectname secthead LDFILE ldptr char sectname SCNHDR secthead Discussion The 1dshread function
244. p isolate the problem Diverting and Undiverting Output Diversions are a way of temporarily saving output The output of mpp960 can at any time be diverted to a temporary file and can be reinserted into the output stream later undiverted 8 23 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 8 24 mpp960 supports up to ten numbered diversions numbered from 0 to 9 Diversion number 0 is the normal output stream The number of available diversions can be increased with the N option Diverting Output Use divert to divert output divert number where number is the diversion to be used If number is left out it is assumed to be zero The expansion of divert is void Diverted output that has not been explicitly undiverted is undiverted when all the input has been processed divert 1 This text is diverted divert gt This text is not diverted gt This text is not diverted D gt gt This text is diverted Several calls of divert with the same argument do not overwrite the previous diverted text but append to it Output diverted to an non existent diversion is discarded This can be used to suppress unwanted output A common example of unwanted output is the trailing newlines after macro definitions Here is how to avoid them divert 1 define foo Macro foo define bar Macro bar divert gt Macro Processor mpp960 This is acommon programming idiom in m4 Undivertin
245. path too complicated for IEEE 695 The converter cannot process any COFF symbol whose addressing path is more complicated than offset register This limitation only affects C function arguments that are allocated in the caller s argument block COFF to IEEE 695 Converter cvt960 One or more COFF symbols index number have invalid tag index number The converter encountered COFF symbols of a tag type struct union Or enum with no reference to their COFF type information The IEEE 695 information for these symbols is not correct 4 9 Coverage Analyzer gcov960 The gcov960 test coverage analysis tool performs basic block execution coverage analysis of instrumented programs To use gcov960 first compile your program with the gcc960 fprof instrumentation option then execute the program with appropriate input data For more information on profiling see the i960 Processor Compiler User s Guide Executing your instrumented program causes the compilation system to update the program database and create a profile data file default pf by default You can then use the options described in this chapter to create a variety of reports showing how your program behaves with various inputs Invocation Invoke the coverage analyzer using the syntax gcov960 control file module option control is one of the controls listed in Table 5 1 file identifies a source file from the profiled pro
246. pecifying High level LibrarieS 0 eeee A 29 SYSLIB Specifying Low level Libraries ccee A 31 NO JFLOAT Supporting Floating point Operations A 31 SEARCH_DIR Extending the Search Path A 32 INCLUDE Including Additional Directive Files A 32 TARGET Using the Search Path for Directive Files A 33 CHECKSUM Preparing for the Bus Confidence Test A 33 OUTPUT Naming the Output File eee A 34 Linker Directive FileS c ccceeeeesssssceeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeees A 35 Appendix B Finding Information in Object Files Using the Common Object File Library COFL B 1 Extracting File Header Information cccceeeeeeees B 2 Function Reference cccccceeeeeeeseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeees B 3 Appendix C Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Characteristics Of COFF cccccecccececececececeeececeneeeneenees C 1 Definitions ANd CONVENTIONS ceseceeecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeneees C 2 SOC TOMS ce n sete tac tec ee eee beds ccna watletien seas boca eines oe C 2 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Physical and Virtual Address ccceeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeees C 3 Pills mle O STEA EAN E daar E cagcaesue cate uy eee pene C 3 File Header Declaration ssssssssssessesesseeeeeeees C 4 File Header Flags ccisesuse ctedae mer iendela tones C 5 File Type Number
247. plays the archiver version information and continues processing arc960 V The following is a sample message Intel 80960 Archiver n n Thu Oct 19 15 14 07 EDT 199n Archiver arc960 gar960 x Extract Option Extracts archive members to files Discussion To copy members to external files in the current directory use x To extract all members list none on the command line The contents of the copied archive member are not affected The archiver overwrites files in the working directory with the same names as the copied members If no such files exist the archiver creates them The extracted files retain the file attributes stored in the archive including the modification date and time To retain the time stamp of when the file was recorded in the library use the o option Example The following example extracts all members of libs a into the current directory The verbose v modifier displays the name of each member extracted arc960 xv libs a 2 21 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide z Suppress Time Stamp Option Suppresses time stamp in the archive header Discussion To suppress the time stamp in the archive header use the z option Example arc960 z libs a 2 22 COFF ELF b out Converter cof960 objcopy cof960 and objcopy convert header information in object files to allow greater portability between hosts Note that cof960 objcopy does not change the data port
248. precede it with an underscore Linker Ink960 gld960 Z Program database Specifies location of program database Z PDB_directory Discussion Use this option to specify the location of the program database For information on the program database used when performing whole program or profile driven optimization see your compiler manual z Time Stamp Suppression Suppresses the time stamp in the COFF output file Z Discussion For COFF files the linker notes the current time and date in the output file header To put Time Zero in place of the current time stamp specify z Time Zero is 4 00 31 December 1969 NOTE Neither b out format nor ELF files have a time stamp 7 57 Macro Processor mpp960 The mpp960 macro processor copies its input to its output expanding macros as it goes The macros are either built in or user defined and can take any number of arguments mpp960 has built in functions for including named files running UNIX commands performing integer arithmetic manipulating text in various ways doing recursion and performing other tasks mpp960 can be used as a stand alone macro processor or as a front end to a compiler or assembler mpp960 is compatible with the UNIX System V Release 3 m4 utility with some minor differences See the Compatibility with Other Macro Processors section in this chapter for more details mpp960 Message Prefixes This chapter contains many examples of mpp
249. put file in the linkage the common symbols defined in that file are sorted based on the size of the symbol Linker Ink960 gld960 J Compress Merges duplicated tags from COFF symbol tables compresses string table Discussion This option merges duplicated COFF symbol tags from output symbol tables Linking with the J option eliminates such duplicated tags The resulting symbol table has tag indices that cross file scope boundaries The file has F_COMP_SYMTAB ORed into the flags of the file header structure see coff h The string table is also compressed with this option L Library Search Path Changes the path for library searches Ldir dir is a directory name Discussion To extend the linker search path described in the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 use L You can use L multiple times on the command line The L option has the same effect as SEARCH_DIR but directories specified with L are searched before directories specified with the SEARCH_DIR directive i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 40 I Library Input Specifies an input library labbr abbr is an abbreviated form of a library name Only one abbr can accompany each 1 Discussion See the Library Naming Conventions and Search Paths section on page 7 21 for information on this option Only the first filename found is used Once closed a library is reopened only when
250. r Ink960 gld960 r Relocation Keeps relocation entries in the output object file Discussion With the r option relocation entries remain in the output object file for a subsequent linker call and the linker issues no warnings about unresolved references Relocation requires symbol table entries that you can remove with the s option The linker accepts no command line containing both the r and s options Example In the following incremental links the first invocation links file1 o and file2 o to produce the relocatable output file 1 out The second links file3 oand file4 o to produce 2 out The third links the two relocatable files to produce done out and writes a link map to stdout 1nk960 r o fl out filel o file2 o 1nk960 r o 2 out file3 o0 file4 o 1nk960 m o done out fl out 2 out 7 49 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Related Topics x X Compress dc dp Define common symbol space s Strip S s Strip Removes debugging or symbolic information from the object file Discussion For a smaller output file strip symbol information with s lower case removing e the line number entries e the symbols e the symbol table information e In ELF output this eliminates all non allocated sections e g debug_info debug_line Using s uppercase retains the symbol table but removes debug symbols This option is supported in COFF and ELF only In ELF this
251. rage report shown below Intel 80960 Coverage Analyzer n n nnn Copyright C 1996 Intel Corporation All rights reserved Coverage Analysis Program Summary No No Blocks No Block Blocks Hits Misses Coverage 13 7 6 53 85 Program database f s a joe tmp pdb Program profile ff s a joe tmp default pf Example 2 e The gcov960 invocation for an instrumented program compare c gcov960 rl Z pdb produces the output in file compare cov shown below The numbers on the left are the execution count for the basic blocks associated with the statement include lt stdio h gt main argc argv int argc char argv LS of int nl n2 1 gt if argc 3 Ht HH HH HE gt printf Usage compare nl n2 n Fett tHE gt exit 0 Coverage Analyzer gcov960 1 gt nl atoi arv 1 E cee n2 atoi arv 2 1131 gt if nl lt 0 n2 lt 0 HH HH HH HE gt printf Use integers larger than zero n Hetet ttt gt exit 0 1 gt if nl n2 1 gt printf n sd equals d n nl n2 else HEtHHEHHE gt if nl lt n2 Ht HH HH HE A gt printf n sd is less than d n nl n2 else Ht Ht HH E gt printf n sd is greater than d n nl n2 No of Blocks 13 Blocks Hit 7 Blocks Missed 6 Source Coverage 53 85 Program database ffs a joe tmp pdb Program profile ffs a joe tmp default pf Example 3 The gcov960 invocation to compare two profile files default
252. rary length section names When incorporating an ELF section into COFF output the linker shortens the name to eight characters 2 Relocation types b out does not support ELF s R_960_suB relocation type If you try to create a relinkable output file with one of these relocations in it and the output OMF is b out or COFF an error occurs Note however that not making a relinkable file does not create a problem The linker relocates it and throws the relocation directives away 3 System procedure sysproc indices The b out OMF accommodates only system procedure indices that are greater than zero and less than 254 If you have a sysproc symbol in a COFF or ELF symbol table whose system procedure index value exceeds the bounds that b out supports and you attempt to include this file in a b out linkage an error occurs 7 15 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 16 Note that when a leafproc crosses from ELF or COFF into b out the leaf entry point is produced from the call symbol For example leafproc x L0 Xi lda 0 g0 LO ret S gas960e t s S gld960 r t o Fbout o t bout o gnm960 t bout o Symbols from t bout o 0x00000000 t x 0x00000004 t xSLF Symbol x appears and also symbol x LF which corresponds to the leaf entry point of x Link time Optimization When the linker performs relocation it changes cal1j calljx pseudo instructions into bal balx instructions when the target of the
253. re Utilities User s Guide Symbols and Functions bf ef target In the symbol table the symbol bf appears between the function name and the first local symbol of the function and the symbol ef appears right after the last local symbol The sequence is shown here function name bf local symbol ef When the return value of the function is a structure or union the compiler creates a target symbol for storing the function return This symbol is an automatic variable of the type pointer and has a value field of zero It appears in the symbol table between the function name and the symbol bf as shown here function name target bt local symbols ef Special Symbols The symbol table contains special symbols that are generated by the assembler the compiler and other utilities Table C 10 shows a list of these symbols Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 10 Special Symbols in the Symbol Table Symbol Definition file filename text address of text section data address of data section bss address of bss section bb address of start of inner block eb address of end of inner block bf address of start of function ef address of end of function target pointer to the structure or union returned by a function xfake dummy tag name for structure union or enumeration 0S end of members of structure union or enumeration _ etext next available addres
254. reads the section header specified by sect indx of the COFF file associated with 1dpt r into memory beginning at secthead The 1dnshread function reads the section header specified by sectname into memory beginning at secthead i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The 1ldshread and 1ldnshread functions return SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in 1dfcn h e The idshread function fails when sect indx is greater than the number of sections in the object file e The idnshread function fails when no section name corresponds with sectname e Either function fails when it cannot read the specified section header The first section header index is 1 Idsseek Idnsseek Seek to an indexed or named file section include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldsseek ldptr sectindx LDFILE ldptr unsigned short sectindx int ldnsseek ldptr sectname LDFILE ldptr char sectname Discussion The 1dsseek function seeks to the section specified by sect indx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr The 1dnsseek function seeks to the section specified by sectname Finding Information in Object Files The 1dsseek and 1dnsseek functions return SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in 1dfcn h e The idsseek function fails when the variable sect indx is greater than the number of sections in the object file e The idnsseek function fails when no section name corresponds wit
255. ress addr relative to the start of the image However the order of the text and data sections is the same as in the input file i e the one linked at the lower address comes first and any gap between the sections is preserved in the output image D filename adar places the data section of the specified file at address addr T filename addr places the text section of the specified file at address addr i NOTE The addr argument is always optional Omitting the address a places the specified section s immediately after the one in the preceding specification or at address 0 in the binary image in the case of the first section specification Using grom960 Generating ROM images is a two step process 1 creating a binary image and 2 converting the image to a ROM image Intel hex files i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 11 4 Creating Binary Images Regardless of the addresses where the code was linked all bytes in a ROM image appear in a contiguous address space relative to the ROM s base address For instance a 64K ROM based at address Oxffff0000 has a ROM address space of 0 0xffff byte 0 of the ROM being the byte that is addressed at Oxffff0000 at run time The binary image is generated by extracting the text and data sections of the input files and placing them at the specified locations in the ROM address space Unused address space bytes are initialized to Oxff the value of a byte in an
256. rmat CAFF Additional sections can accommodate multiple text or data blocks shared data blocks or user specified sections For a linked file each COFF section in that file has a begin and an end symbol Generally __Bname is the begin symbol for each section and __Ename is the end symbol where name matches the COFF section name The begin and end symbols are limited to a length of 8 characters Physical and Virtual Address In most COFF files the physical address and virtual address of each section or symbol are the same even though the section heading contains an address field for both For example on a system with paging the address is located relative to address zero of virtual memory and the operating system performs another address translation File Header The file header contains 20 bytes of information about the object file Table C 1 shows the contents of the file The _opthdr field contains the size of the optional header information The i960 processor utilities such as the dumper work properly on any common object file because they use the contents of the f_opthdr field to locate the end of the optional header information and seek past the header C 4 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table C 1 File Header Contents Bytes 0 1 2 3 4 7 12 15 16 17 18 19 Declaration unsigned short unsigned short long int long int long int unsigned short unsigned sh
257. rmative data 4 Terminate profiling automatic required Call _term_profile from IxWorks shell and redirect output to file with asc extension Analysis 1 Invoke ghist960 required required NOTE Because the IxWorks version of the library uses stdio Virtual I O must be enabled by the shell 14 14 Statistical Profiler ghist960 Description of File Formats Emitted by the Library Figure 14 5 Table 14 9 After _term_profile is called performance data will be sent to the host If using libhs a binary dat file will automatically be created in the directory mondb was invoked in If using libixhs the data is sent to stdout which must then be manually redirected to a file on the host It is important that this file has an asc extension indicating that it is in ASCII form Each version of the library has generally the same format Data File Format bucket size IP hit Pair IP hit Pair Depending on which version of the library you are using the file will be stored in either ASCII or binary format Ghist960 distinguishes the file s format by it s extension File Formats Generated by the ghist960 Library Operating System Format Extension IxWorks ASCII aSC MON960 binary dat 14 15 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Binary Data Format Table 14 10 The binary format stores integers in little endian byte order The first integer is the bucket siz
258. rt section Assign Value To Variable W6 ASW6 The ASW6 record contains a byte offset pointer to the module Trailer part relative to the beginning of the module A zero 0 value indicates that this part is not included in the module SE2 D7 06 n n Byte offset in file in number format see the AD Extension Part section Assign Value To Variable ASW7 The ASW7 record contains a byte offset pointer to the ME record relative to the beginning of the module SE2 D7 07 n n Byte offset in File in number format see the AD Extension Part section AD Extension Part The AD Extension Part contains information describing how the object module was created This part is located after the header part and the AD record It is pointed to by the WO portion of ASWO An NN record with a unique index associates ATN records defining the additional information For more information on the syntax of records in the AD Extension Part see the HP MRI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics section The AD Extension Part has the following format NN SFO nl Id ATN F1 SCE nl n2 n3 x1 x2 Id HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Table D 5 SFO NN record type nl Symbol name NN record type Id Symbol name F1CE ATN Record type nl Symbol name index must be the same index as was specified for the NN record n2 Symbol type index unused set to 0 n3 Attribute definition The attribute definit
259. rt _rom_prcb cwd1 cwd2 cwd3 cwd4 cwd5 For the CHECKSum definition for a particular target processor see the chapter on initialization in the appropriate processor user s manual OUTPUT Naming the Output File To specify an output filename other than the default use OUTPUT OUTPUT filename filename is the output filename Linker Command Language The default output filenames are a out for COFF format output b out for b out format output e out for ELF format output The output directive has the same effect as the o linker option Linker Directive Files To avoid reentering a long or often used invocations keep options and filename information in a text file containing linker directives Linker directive files typically use the extension 1d For example the following specifies filel o file2 o and file3 o in the linker invocation 1nk960 f Oxffff filel o file2 o file3 o The following directive file named 1nkcmd 1d specifies the same filenames and f option f Oxffff filel o file2 o file3 o Using 1nkcmd 1d shortens the linker invocation 1nk960 lnkcmd txt You can put options object filenames and library filenames in directive files To nest directive files use INCLUDE Precede options in directive files with a hyphen not a slash regardless of your host system The linker processes filenames and INCLUDE directives in the order encountered Linker directive files support
260. ry search path linker option 7 39 1 Local archiver option modifier 2 12 library naming conventions and search order linker 7 21 linker 7 1 7 57 B section start address option 7 27 binding profile counters to non standard sections 7 19 c circular library search option 7 29 C startup alternative option 7 29 calljx i960 RP processor 7 19 d define common symbol space option 7 31 D inhibit CAVE section compression option 7 31 default allocation A 7 defsym define a symbol option 7 32 directives A 4 e entry point option 7 33 ELF DWARE sections 7 4 environment variables 7 20 f fill option 7 35 F format option 7 34 G big endian target option 7 36 linker continued Index 3 Index 4 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide gcdm decision maker option 7 37 h help option 7 38 H sort common symbols option 7 38 incremental linking 7 13 J compress option 7 39 1 library input option 7 40 L library search path option 7 39 library naming conventions and search order 7 21 link time optimization 7 16 linker directive files specifying 7 12 m memory map option 7 42 M multiple definition warning option 7 42 memory block and section allocation 7 2 N name memory map file option 7 43 n noinhibit output option 7 44 named BSS sections 7 4 O optimization of calls inhibited option 7 44 o output filename option 7 4
261. s alignment specifications Specify the section alignment or address not both after the name of an output section specification before the colon and the opening brace ALIGN align expr o section l statements addr expr align expr evaluates to a power of 2 addr expr evaluates to an address in configured memory Instead of allocating the output sections by an address you can assign an output section to a specific memory region by name or by attribute For a region name use the gt operator and the name after the output section definition o section statements gt region region is a memory region name or attribute list as defined in a MEMORY directive The gt is required For more information on matching sections and memory regions by attribute see the MEMORY Configuring Memory Regions section NOTE You cannot specify both an address and a memory region Treating Output Sections as a Unit GROUP You can specify a set of output sections to be treated as a unit including e contiguous memory locations with the order of the sections preserved e homogeneous attributes kept together in a single memory region Linker Command Language Put the output sections in a GROUP block in the SECTIONS directive You can define multiple groups GROUP addr spec section defs gt mem spec addr spec specifies an alignment or address For more information on this subject see the description for
262. s 2st cect ectess costars tote ees ieaetnebeeeces C 6 Execution File Header Declaration ecceeeeeeees C 7 Section Headers e E EAE C 7 Section Header Declaration ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 8 Section Header Flags cccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees C 9 SE CHONG zen so con AE DEEE EEE C 11 FROIOC ALO Ms ascct os setae dcat sees cu aetnied cubntind ewan tan diadnteaatuanteustabacwateds C 11 Relocation Entry Declaration 00 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee C 12 Direct Relocation seina wasted C 13 IP relative Relocation ssseeeeeesseessseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 13 Line Number Entry ecicctcnccctaecdeceesh cacustaeteaenae C 14 SY FIDO Table sence spree ces seeea Sten Soba a Gems a a eegaas C 15 Symbol Table Entries cccccceceeeeessssscceeeeeeeeeeeessnaeees C 16 Structure for Symbol Table Entries C 17 Symbols and Inner Blocks bb eD seeen C 18 Symbols and Functions bf ef target 0 0 0 C 20 Speci l Symbols cesta eects ete ee catered eilient wuteabres C 20 SYMDOMNAMEC se onetent tnt ten tes Sait eicasuctis C 22 Storage Classes sisiecsetiecrenenevestonceetanieniereheetaietienesd C 23 Storage Classes for Special Symbols cccceeeeees C 25 Call Optimization sa scaccenbtaxeneresoceses vekdeetrtentacreencuney sana n C 25 Symbol Value Field c ccccceeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaees C 26 Section Number Field ccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C
263. s L variable Taken together these statements imply that the example module in Section 4 1 of the standard is illegal HP and MRI follow the definition as stated in Section 10 1 of the IEEE Trial Use Standard Set Current Section SB The SB record defines the current section SB has no effect on the P variable SE5 nl E5 Record type nl Section index Set Current PC ASP The ASP record sets a new value for the current PC An ASP record is required after an SB record to reset the value of the P variable SE2 D0 nl n2 E2D0 Record type nl Section index n2 Expression defining new value in minimum address units Load Constant Bytes LD The LD record specifies the number of minimum address units to be loaded as constant data SED nl SED Record type nl Number of minimum address units 1 127 nl x minimum address unit size data bytes D 31 D 32 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Repeat Data RE The RE record specifies data initialization in a compact form SF7 nl SF7 Record type nl Expression defining number of times to repeat the following LD or LR record data The IEEE 695 standard has been extended to include repeating LD records The length of data that can be repeated is limited to 128 bytes Trailer Part The Trailer part contains the records described below Starting Address ASG The ASG record is optional and defines the exec
264. s after the output section text _edata next available address after the output section data _end next available address after the output section bss _ _Bname address of beginning of name _ _Ename address of end of name The symbols __Bname and __Ename are generated by the linker as a convenience to the user __Bname marks the beginning of a section denoted as name and _ _Ename marks the byte following the last byte of the section NOTE These symbol names are preceded by a double underscore _ _ These symbol names cannot exceed 8 characters in length C 21 C 22 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide When _ _Bname and __Ename mark the beginning and end of the text data and bss sections the initial period in the filenames is dropped Thus the sections text and data would be delimited by __Btext __Etext _Bdata and__Edata The initial period in any user defined section however is retained A user file called mysec for example would be delimited by __B mysec and ___E mysec Six special symbols come in pairs The bb and eb pair indicates the boundaries of inner blocks The bf and ef pair brackets each function The xfake and eos pair names and defines the limit of unnamed structures unions and enumerations The eos symbol also appears after named structures unions and enumerations When a structure union or enumeration has no tag name the compiler invents a symbol table
265. s by the modification dates or adds new members reports the archiver version and continues processing reports the archiver version and stops processing extracts members to files without modifying the archive suppresses time stamp in archive header See Page 2 10 2 11 2 11 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 17 2 20 2 20 2 21 2 22 Archiver arc960 gar960 Table 2 2 Archiver Option Modifiers Modifier Used With Effect See Page apname fr u orm adds or positions members after the pname 2 7 member b pname r u orm adds or positions members before the pname 2 8 i pname member c roru suppresses the archive creation message 2 9 any option uses the current working directory for temporary 2 12 files o x uses the member last modified date as the 2 14 extracted file creation date s any option creates or updates the library symbol table 2 16 or none u r updates members only when the member last 2 17 modified date is older than the file last modified date v any option reports the archiver progress 2 19 Option and Modifier Arguments Invoke the archiver with an option and one or more modifiers Some modifiers can operate without the option see Table 2 2 Some modifiers require arguments The archiver interprets any string following such a modifier as the argument Omitting an argument at the end of the command line causes an error For example arc960 rb xy No archive name specified i960 Proce
266. s of a Memory Imag eeeeeereeeees 12 20 12 4 split Command Example cccceeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeees 12 23 C 1 Object File Format zs cesteceiseeesmeieeeseecesieeeteehes C 2 C 2 Flag Field Values ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 10 C 3 String Tabler nn a a C 42 C 4 An Archive LIDIary cs ces cnet moines C 43 C 5 An Archive Membet ccccceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee C 44 C 6 The Archive Symbol Table eeeeeeeeeeee rete C 48 1 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities eee 1 2 1 2 Invocation Names for Backwards Compatibility 1 3 2 1 Archiver Options cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 2 2 Archiver Option ModifiersS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 3 2 3 Verbose Modifier Information Display 8 2 19 3 1 cof960 objcopy Options cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 4 1 CVt9GO ODTIONS eee e cece eeeeee eee eeeteeteeeeeeeeeeneees 4 2 4 2 Mappings Between COFF and IEEE 695 B ilt in Py POS irune iiei masa Saleen maaan ETR 4 6 5 1 gcov960 Controls sas cets tetera anaes pce dete acetal 5 2 5 2 gcov960 Options s lt lt es cuwie x teamua en cacuwaens 5 3 xiii i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide xiv 6 1 dmp960 gdmp960 Options eect eee 6 2 7 1 JEMKEROPUGNS Aine oat ee eee 7 7 7 2 Branch and link and System call Optimization 7 17 7 3 Supported Input Output Architecture Combinatio
267. scope General Syntax Rules Miscellaneous records are composed of groups of NN ASN and ATN records that together form a cluster or packet of information The miscellaneous record cluster can be thought of as a list of parameters the first of which constitutes a classification number that dishes each cluster from all others Remaining parameters are the information conveyed by the record cluster Parameters In Miscellaneous Records Parameters in miscellaneous records may be character strings numerical constants compiler labels or relocatable expressions The object module format constrains neither the number of parameters a miscellaneous record may have nor which of the permissible parameter types is to be used in any of the individual parameter slots except the first slot The first slot D 40 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide must be the numerical information classification code The number and composition of the remaining parameter slots is completely determined by the syntax specification for each miscellaneous record However the following rules apply to individual parameter values 1 Numerical constants may be signed and have absolute values between 0 and 23 1 2 Floating point constants must be represented as quoted strings Every parameter that is a number or relocatable expression is represented in the miscellaneous record cluster by an individual ASN record and every parameter that is a string
268. section containing initialized data and by default follows text bss block started by symbol is a unique section containing uninitialized data and by default follows data Linker Ink960 gld960 A COFF or ELF program contains at least the three standard sections containing up to 65535 lines or relocation entries each COFF section names are restricted to eight or fewer characters ELF section names can be any length For information on the COFF file format see Appendix C For more information on the ELF format see the 80960 Embedded Application Interface Specification Intel order number 631999 The following example includes two global declarations and an assignment The translated assignment code is stored in t ext the i variable in data and the abc variable in bss as shown in Figure 7 1 int abc 200 in the bss section because abc is not initialized in the data xy int i 100 section because i is initialized int f AY abc i 0 instructions are placed ay in the text section Figure 7 1 C Program Storage Contents Memory Section Instruction abc i 0 text Variable i 100 data Value Assigned Variable abc abc 200 bss No Value Assigned OSD312 7 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide You can define and link the sections in any order In your assembly source text and linker directive files you can create and name additional text type da
269. seek function fails when no section name corresponds with sectname e Either function fails when the specified section has no line number entries or when the function cannot seek to the specified entries The first section index is 1 B 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Idohseek Seeks to the COFF optional file header include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h int ldohseek ldptr LDFILE ldptr Discussion The 1dohseek function seeks to the optional file header of the COFF file currently associated with ldptr The 1dohseek function returns SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h Failure occurs when e The object file has no optional header e The function cannot seek to the optional header Idopen Idaopen Opens an object file or archive member for reading include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h DFILE ldopen filename ldptr char filename DFILE ldptr DFILE ldaopen filename oldptr char filename FILE oldptr B 10 Finding Information in Object Files Discussion The 1dopen and 1dclose functions provide uniform access to both simple object files and object files that are members of archive files When ldptr is NULL ldopen e opens the file indicated by filename e allocates and initializes the LDF ILE structure e returns a pointer to that structure to the calling program When 1dptr is valid and TYPE 1dptr is an
270. sisted Virtual Execution CAVE by the user Using the D option prevents the linker from performing this processing For more information on CAVE see the i960 Processor Compiler User s Guide d Define Common Symbol Space Allocates common symbols to bss even when doing r links dc dp c and p have identical effects Discussion To assign common symbol space in an output file linked with the r Relocation option use dc or dp This option has the same effect as the FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION directive It places common symbols by default into the bss section The final link automatically allocates space for common symbols 7 31 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 32 Example The following assigns space in the bss section of a out for common symbols and retains relocation information for later re linking 1nk960 rdc dcomm o filel o defsym Define a Symbol Defines an absolute defsym name expr name names the symbol expr initializes the symbol Discussion To define a symbol on the linker command line use defsym You can reference the symbol in your source text in a directive file or on the linker command line Example The following resolves any references to filenum1 in filel oor file2 o Its value is zero absolute 1nk960 defsym filenum1 0 filel o file2 o Related Topic R Read symbols only Linker Ink960 gld960 e Entry Point Defines the primar
271. specify more than one position modifier the last one takes effect Examples 1 The following commands both place file2 o immediately before filel oim libx a arc960 mb filel o libx a file2 o arc960 mi filel o libx a file2 o Archiver arc960 gar960 2 The following example replaces existing members in 1ibo a with corresponding files from the current working directory positioning any new members immediately before filel o arc960 rb filel o libo a o Related Topics After Move Update Insert Replace c Create Modifier Suppresses the archive creation message Discussion To suppress the archive creation message specify c Using the replace r or update u option with a nonexistent archive filename creates a new archive The archiver displays a message such as the following on stdout arc960 creating archive archive is the name of the new archive that you specified 2 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Example Assuming that libx a does not already exist the following example creates an empty 1ibx a archive without displaying an archive creation message arc960 rc libx a d Delete Option Deletes archive members Discussion To delete all members specified on the command line use d In release 6 0 the archiver no longer strips the symbol table information from an archive filewhen an element is deleted Example The following example deletes file1 o from l
272. ssor Software Utilities User s Guide 12 18 Examples 1 The following reorders data bits 0 through 7 in test and places the new image in bldrom rom 64000 8 move hello mkimage hello test permute d test 0 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 bldrom 2 The following reverses address bits 16 through 31 placing the new image in hello2 rom 120000 32 move hello mkimage hello romhello permute a romhello 012345 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 hello2 Related Topics mkimage split rom rom Specifies the image length and width rom length width count length is the number of bytes in the ROM image width is the width of the ROM image in bits count is the maximum number of ROM images ROM Image Builder rom960 Discussion Use this option to specify the length width and number of ROM images before using a permute command Figure 12 3 shows an eight ROM memory image and an example of the command required to specify it If you specify a count the rommer issues a warning message for any mkimage output greater than the expected memory size in bytes To determine the expected memory size use the formula length count The permute d command uses width and permute a uses both length and width as the number of bits to be permuted 12 19 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Figure 12 3 Dimensions of a Memory Image 16 Bits Wide A 8 Bits Wide 1 000 Bytes
273. ssor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 4 Specifying the Object Module Format By default the archiver creates libraries in COFF format However the default is overridden when you e specify a different format with the F option See page 2 11 e specify a object file on the command line that is not in COFF format For example to create an empty archive in COFF format enter the command gar960 u libname a To create an empty library in ELF format use the F option gar960 Felf u libname a However when you instruct the archiver to add a non COFF object file to a new archive the archiver uses the object file s format For example if you enter the command gar960 u libname a elf_omf_file o the archiver creates a new library in ELF format When you use the F option to specify a library format and try to add an object file in a different format the archiver uses the format of the object file For example gar960 Felf u libname a coff_omf_file o creates a new library in COFF format Once a library is created all object files within it must be of the same format For example trying to add an ELF format object file to a COFF format archive produces an error message Archiver arc960 gar960 Temporary Directory The archiver creates and deletes temporary files You can choose the temporary working directory Specify the local 1 modifier with a directory argument in the archiver invocation Define the
274. ster version and creation date on stdout and continues processing v sorts the symbols ascending numerically by value v960 displays the version and creation date and stops processing x displays the addresses in hexadecimal the default 10 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 10 4 Table 10 2 Section Codes Code Symbol Type u undefined symbol a absolute non relocatable symbol t text type section symbol instructions d data type section symbol initialized data and constants b bss symbol uninitialized data c common symbol o any other type section symbol COFF or ELF only f filename symbol debugger symbol table entry The COFF display also includes Class a storage class such as extern for an external symbol or fcn for the beginning and end of a function block Line the source line number defining the symbol for object files containing debug information Type the type and derived type for object files containing debug information Size the size in bytes for object files containing debug information To suppress the additional COFF information specify the p option Symbols are displayed in the order in which they appear in the symbol table preserving the scoping information You can sort the symbols by name or address with the n R and v options Name Lister gnm960 nam960 Examples 1 The following displays the symbols from each of the members of t
275. struct the linker to search multiple libraries For example if you specify STARTUP yourlib the linker searches for yourlib yourlib_b yourlib_p and yourlib_e ENTRY Defining the Entry Point The linker selects an entry point with the following order of precedence the symbol you specify with the e option the symbol you specify with the ENTRY directive the start symbol if defined the _main symbol if defined the first address in text the address 0 Dh eR Auto You can assign the entry point with e ENTRY or an assignment to start or _main For example start _my_start_function You can use ENTRY anywhere in your directive file including inside an output section definition PRE_HLL Specifying Libraries to be Processed Before the High level Libraries The syntax for the new directive is PRE_HLL libraries libraries is an abbreviation for one or more high level support libraries to be linked prior to those specified with an HLL directive The common library abbreviations are described on page 7 21 Linker Command Language The linker directive PRE_HLL allows the user to specify libraries that are processed immediately before the high level language libraries specified with the HLL directive The linker now loads the object files and libraries in the following order 1 The filename specified with STARTUP 2 All the object files and libraries listed individually in the invocat
276. symbols except types and lines It represents one compilation unit a full compilation module with include files It is formatted as shown below BB4 BB6 NN ATN ASN where BB4 blocks are global functions and BB6 blocks are static functions or unnamed blocks The NN ATN ASN pairings are public static or external symbols locals are in BB4 and BB6 blocks The name index for NN ATN and ASN records must match HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D BB4 and BB6 Blocks BB4 and BB6 are scoping blocks and represent functions procedures They contain all local symbols to the function BB6 blocks may nest inside of BB4 and BB6 blocks If the BB6 block has a null name it is a scoping block only blocks in C The BB4 and BB6 blocks are formatted as shown below BB6 NN ATN or NN ATN ASN where at least one NN record must be present for each ATN and ASN name index used The optionality of NN records is available only for special ATN records register lifetime A local variable with the same name as another symbol in an outer block must still have a new NN record The NN ATN or ASN records that describe a symbol must all reside within the same BB BE scope their affiliation cannot cross BB or BE boundaries The optionality of ASN records is defined earlier in this document BB5 and BB10 Blocks A BBS block carries the source file information such as the source filename include filenames and lines It is forma
277. t a later time This is done with the built ins pushdef and popdef pushdef name expansion popdef name which are quite analogous to define and undefine These macros work in a stack like fashion A macro is temporarily redefined with pushdef which replaces an existing definition of name while saving the previous definition before the new one is installed If there is no previous definition pushdef behaves exactly like define If a macro has several definitions of which only one is accessible the topmost definition can be removed with popdef If there is no previous definition popdef does nothing If a macro with several definitions is redefined with define the topmost definition is replaced with the new definition If it is removed with undefine all the definitions are removed not only the topmost one It is possible to temporarily redefine a built in with pushdef and defn Indirect Call of Macros Any macro can be called indirectly with indir indir name This results in a call to the macro name which is then passed the rest of the arguments You can use indir to call macros with illegal names because define allows such names to be defined Some macro packages have private macros that can be called only through the built in indir i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Indirect Call of Built Ins Built in macros can be called indirectly with builtin builtin name
278. t is used Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Table C 9 Symbol Table Entry Format Bytes Declaration Name Definition 0 7 n the name of a pointer or of a symbol 8 11 long int n_value symbol value storage class dependent 12 13 short n_scnum section number of symbol 14 15 unsigned short n_flags pic pid flags for the module containing the symbol flag when symbol is a section name 16 19 unsigned long n_type basic and derived type specification 20 char n_sclass storage class 21 char n_numaux number of auxiliary entries 22 23 char pad2 2 padding to force alignment Structure for Symbol Table Entries Example C 7 shows the C language structure declaration for the symbol table entry that can be found in the coff h header file Example C 7 Symbol Table Entry Declaration define SYMNMLEN 8 Number of characters ina symbol name struct syment union char _n_name SYMNMLEN symbol name struct long _n_zeroes zero name in string table long _n_offset offset into string table n_n char 2 nNpe sn 2 iz allows for overlaying on long n_value value of symbol short n_scnum section number continued amp i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Example C 7 Symbol Table Eniry Declaration continued unsigned short n_flags copy of flags from input file header if not a section symbol unsigned long n_type typ
279. ta type and BSS type sections for COFF and ELF programs You can also specify section and global symbol addresses and overlap or suppress some sections ELF DWARF Sections ELF DWARE sections are placed in non allocated sections The linker concatenates and relocates these sections but allocates no memory for them These sections are all allocated to memory address 0 This includes among other sections debug_info and debug_abbrev For more information on the ELF format see the 80960 Embedded Application Interface Specification Intel order number 631999 Named BSS Sections Named Block Started by Symbol BSS sections are supported by the linker When the linker detects the symbol clear_named_bss_sections in the linkage the linker generates code to resolve this symbol By default the code is composed of a ret instruction only However when the linker detects any number of named bss sections in its output it generates code to clear the sections and places this code in the clear_named_bss_sections code Working with Linker Directive Files The sample linker directive file below is for the Cyclone 1960 Cx processor based evaluation board By default the installation program places this file in SG960BASE I960BASE lib cycx 1d The commands under the Memory directive define the areas of memory that are available and the type of memory that resides there This platform has two memory blocks defined a DRAM region
280. ted tags and compresses string table COFF only adds a directory to the library and directive file search path Default Action uses the beginning of text as the entry point defaults to b out for gld960 and COFF for Ink960 initializes the memory between sections to 0 little endian target files does not invoke gcdom960 does not sort common symbols uses no compression uses a search path determined by the output format and invocation name continued amp Linker Ink960 gld960 Table 7 1 Linker Options continued Name Option Library input labbr Memory map m Name map file Nfile Noinhibit n output Optimization Ob inhibit Os Output ofilename filename Profiling P Position p b c d independence Read symbols Rfilename only Relocation r Effect specifies a library filename abbreviation writes a memory map to stdout places memory map in file Useful only with m produces an output file regardless of errors inhibits the branch and link or system call optimizations names the output file adds profiling initialization code This option is useful only when combined with r marks the output as position independent PIC PID issuing a warning for non PIC PID input Uses libraries with PIC pc PID pd or both pb includes only the symbols from the specified object file retains the relocation entries in the output file
281. ter gnm960 nam960 Ch 10 section size printer gsize960 size960 Ch 13 stripper gstrip960 str960 Ch 15 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide DOS No Longer Supported as a Host As of release 5 1 CTOOLS no longer supports DOS as a host For PC development CTOOLS now supports Microsoft Windows NT and 95 These platforms provide a far more robust development environment and allow PC users to run CTOOLS without the PharLap software required by previous versions Invocation Command line The utility programs and tools described in this manual are command line driven This means that to use these tools you must either e type invocation commands in at your host system s command prompt e use command scripts response files or batch files that can execute on your host or e use a tool such as Microsoft nmake Opus make or UNIX make There are two similar styles of invocation command line resembling other Windows and UNIX program invocation commands The primary difference between the Windows and UNIX style command lines is that case upper and lower is significant in UNIX paths directories and filenames whereas Windows does not recognize case The other difference between Windows and UNIX style command lines involves punctuation of pathnames and invocation options as described below Invocation Names The command line for each utility consists of a program name e g Ink960 or mpp960 options optional
282. ters In Miscellaneous Records 00 000088 Optional Parameter FieldS cccecssseeeeeeeesstteeeeeeees Codes for Miscellaneous RecordS sssccceeeeeeees Policies for Adding and Modifying Miscellaneous ReCOldS 38 cies Oi acti ek os ale a n iA Policies for Generating and Reading Miscellaneous R cords ada ne a E a aE E lant ietescats Index Examples C 1 File Header Declaration ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees C 2 Section Header Declaration c cccceeeeseeeeeeeeees C 3 Relocation Entry Declaration eeeeeeeeeeees C 4 Line Number Grouping eeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 5 Line Number Entry Declaration cceeeeereeeeeees Contents Figures Tables C 6 COFF Symbol Table cccccceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 16 C 7 Symbol Table Entry Declaration cccceeee C 17 G 8 Nested BIOCKS vccciccnceccesecigslicntivessatetees stances eteneetnteeee C 19 C 9 Example of a Symbol Table ee eect C 19 C 10 Auxiliary Symbol Table Enttry ceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees C 39 C 11 Archive Member Heade s cccceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeneees C 45 2 1 Archive Member Replace and Update Operations 2 6 7 1 C Program Storage vitelratGeear et Avedon ied ede eetat 7 3 12 1 rom960 Rommer Operations cceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeees 12 1 12 2 Data Placement in Memory Image eeeeeeees 12 2 12 3 Dimension
283. text mkimage prepares an image of the data to be programmed into PROMS split divides the image into the two eight bit wide units The first unit contains even numbered bytes 0 2 4 the second contains odd numbered bytes 1 3 5 ihex converts the split images into the hexadecimal format required for a PROM programming device The 0 and 1 characters represent arguments from the rommer invocation Directive Reference This section describes the rommer directives alphabetically Note that example commands are those that you would place in a linker directive ld file or enter at the rommer command prompt 12 6 ROM Image Builder rom960 checksum Computes and stores a checksum checksum image start addr end addr checksum addr 16 32 image is the name of the file in which the checksum is placed start addr is the checksum starting address end addr is the checksum ending address checksum addr is the checksum result address 16 32 is an option argument to specify a 16 or 32 bit checksum The default is a 16 bit checksum Discussion To compute a 16 or 32 bit checksum CRC over a specified address range in the image file use checksum The result appears in the image at the checksum addr you specify A checksum address beyond the end of the image extends the image padding any additional intervening bytes with Oxff 12 7 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide
284. th an index greater than 259 for COFF programs e using calljx with an index greater than 257 or less than 1 for b out format programs For link time optimization design any hand coded assembly language leaf procedures for both call cal13 cal1jx and branch and link bal balx access Then the linker can optimize the call while protecting any indirect procedure accesses that are not recognized as optimizable 7 17 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 18 The following example provides both branch and link and call access leafproc _name _second _name lda retlbl g14 _second mov g14 g13 The subroutine appears her bx g13 retlbl ret e Branch and link instructions place the address of the next instruction in g14 before branching e The lda instruction at the _name label places the ret 1b1 address of the ret instruction in 914 e The first leafproc argument _name is used as the call and callx entry point e The second leafproc argument _second used as the bal and balx entry point e The branch destination is g13 whose contents are determined by the contents of g14 which vary depending upon the entry point In either case the routine returns correctly when the bx instruction is executed The 1da instruction at _name places ret 1b1 in g14 when the routine is entered by _name and by a call or cal1x instruction The g14 register contains the address of the instruction after the bal or balx
285. th given with the 1960BASE environment variable the current working directory The following example shows a linker search path using the slash UNIX directory syntax 1nk960 L ffs qqq lxyz objects o Tpath2 Linker Ink960 gld960 The path2 1d directive file contains SEARCH_DIR abc For the default KB architecture the linker constructs the following library filenames xyz a libxyz a xyzkb a libxyzkb a The linker searches the following directories ffs qqq xyz a abc xyz a SI960LIB xyz a SI960LLIB xyz a SI960BASE 1lib xyz a XYZ a ff fs qqq libxyz a abc libxyz a SI960LIB libxyz a SI960LLIB libxyz a SI960BASE 1lib libxyz a libxyz a ff s qqq xyzkb a abc xyzkb a SI960LIB xyzkb a SI960LLIB xyzkb a SI960BASE 1ib xyzkb a xyzkb a ff is qqq libxyzkb a abc libxyzkb a SI960LIB libxyzkb a SI960LLIB libxyzkb a SI960BASE 1ib libxyzkb a libxyzkb a 7 23 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 24 Library Search Order When i960 Rx Architecture Is Selected When a non i960 Rx architecture is specified the linker searches first for architecture neutral libraries then for architecture specific libraries For example when the linker looks for the i960 KA processor libc library it first tries to find 1ibc a and if the library is not found the linker looks for libcka a Because files targeted for the i960 Rx processor require target specific libraries the
286. that begins at address 0xA0008000 and is 0x1ff8000 bytes in length and an SRAM region that Linker Ink960 gld960 begins at address 0xa0000100 and is 0x300 bytes long Notice that the DRAM address range allows room for the RAM space required by the on board monitor The commands in SECTIONS specify where the linker places the different program sections in memory MEMORY Ox1ff 8000 32M less monitor 0x300 dram org 0xA0008000 len isram org 0x00000100 len SECTIONS text gt dram data gt dram bss gt dram Arithmetic controls location when using floating point library SFP_AC fpem_CA_AC gt isram Bounds of heap The heap may be placed in a separate memory region if desired _heap_size 0x20000 _heap_base _end Oxf amp Oxf heap_end _heap_base _heap_size 1 _stackbase marks base of user stack stack is allocated following the heap The stack may be based in a separate memory region if desired _stackbase _heap_end 0x10 amp Ox0f STARTUP crt960 HLL SYSLIB libmn SYSLIB Libil FLOAT 7 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 6 The remaining options specify the floating point and other libraries used heap_size heap_base heap_end and _stackbase are global symbols that define the heap and stack For more information on the linker
287. the T option MEMORY Configuring Memory Regions Use the MEMoRY directive to e Specify the target memory size e Designate configured and unconfigured memory regions e Prepare memory regions for specific sections A 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 6 Omitting MEMORY configures a single RWxI region from 0x0 through Oxffffffft The syntax is MEMORY name attr origin expr length expr be wa name is a symbol for an address range attr is one or more of the attributes listed in Table A 3 The parentheses are required when you specify attr origin is a keyword assigning the region starting address You can abbreviate origin to org or o Use either a space or a comma to separate origin and length length is a keyword assigning the region size in bytes You can abbreviate length to len or 1 expr is a decimal octal or hexadecimal expression in C syntax NOTE When you prepare memory regions for sections or groups with attr the MEMORY attribute list must exactly match the corresponding SECTIONS attribute list Omitting the attribute list gives the memory region the RWXI attributes Linker Command Language Table A 3 Memory and Section Attributes Attribute Characteristic R indicates a readable region Ww indicates a writable region X indicates an executable region IL indicate a region that can be initialized NOTE Specifying more me
288. the name lister tries a out You can specify complete pathnames On UNIX case is significant in filenames and pathnames The symbolic information appears on stdout The display includes Code Name Value the section code as listed in Table 10 2 in lowercase for local symbols and in uppercase otherwise the symbol name the symbol value Name Lister gnm960 nam960 Table 10 1 gnm960 nam960 Options Option Effect displays the debug information d displays the addresses in decimal e displays only the global external and static symbols including the leaf procedure names f displays all the symbols including redundant symbols such as text data and bss that are usually suppressed This option overrides the g or e option g is the same as e h suppresses the output header display help displays help information M disables the name demangling function n sorts the symbols alphabetically by name This option overrides v o displays the addresses in octal p displays the information in a three column parseable format the b out and ELF format default R Reverses the symbol sorting order of the n or v options sorts in descending order displays the names of the files defining or referencing each symbol s displays the library symbol map T truncates the symbol names to fit the display column widths u displays only the undefined symbols This option overrides g e or E V displays the name li
289. the output Section text 0 8600000c callx Oxc 4 8600000c callx Oxc 8 5931488c addi 12 45 6 Notice that in the second line proci from the source code is converted to Oxc the user specified address for procl Adding the s option to the command line instructs the disassembler to display the symbol name instead of its address For example this command line gdmp960 t2 0 s S produces the following output Section text 0 8600000c callx procl 4 8600000c callx procl 8 5931488c addi 12 r5 r6 Notice that in the both callx statements procl now appears instead of Oxc Using the s option causes the disassembler to display the symbol name for all calls to that address 6 5 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide NOTE This option was supported in the rev 5 0 disassembler as the undocumented a switch This option has been renamed s Examples The examples that follow show how you can extract information from object files with dmp960 The file t c is a simple C program that is first compiled then assembled int arr 12 3 4 F static int index main int tempt func arr index ic960 S g t c cat t s Command line ic960 ic960 S g t c Command line Gol lt ffs pl dev sun4 lib ccl 960 ic960 ffancy errors sinfo tmp ica02371 sin fno builtin quiet Fcoff mkb mic3 0 compat fsigned char w1 bname_tmp tmp ica02371 btm 00 g
290. the size calculation Note that using siz960 gsize960 with the n option produces output that is identical to that produced by version 5 0 of the sizer Statistical Profiler ghist960 Overview The ghist960 utility facilitates statistical analysis of the execution behavior of programs containing debug information Ghist960 works with e b out COFF and ELF files e big or little endian byte ordered files e IxWorks and MON960 monitors The statistical profiler consists of two separate components Component Runs On Function 1 ghist960 Host Displays performance data created by the ghist960 reporting run time library After profiling is completed this data tool is stored in a file that resides on the host 2 ghist960 Target The target specific library that is linked with the code run time to be analyzed During profiling the library collects library performance data and writes this data to the host Figure 14 1 ghist960 Profiler Environment ghist960 host data file 14 1 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 14 2 Table 14 1 NOTE Statistical profiling differs from precise profiling which is described in the i960 Processor Compiler User s Guide Terminology Term ghist960 library libhs libixhs library variable host target msec _ btext _etext IP TIMER1 TCR1 TRR1 TMR1 IMSK Definition Target dependent run time library either libhs or libixhs MON 960
291. thname Discussion To specify an output filename other than the default use o The default output filenames are a out for COFF output b out for b out format output e out for ELF output 7 45 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 46 Example The following command links file o creating proto out in the testdir directory 1nk960 Texv o testdir proto out file o Related Topic F Format P Profiling Puts profiling code in the linker output to support the two pass optimizing compiler Discussion This option adds the profiling startup code used by the compiler This option is useful only when combined with r By default P is not included when using the r option Note that the linker does not properly handle a file with cc_info two pass profiling information generated by the compiler without the presence of a text section Example The following command links for profiling optimization and makes the output relocatable g1d960 P r file o Linker Ink960 gld960 p Position independence Marks the linker output file as position independent d pitblie Discussion To link and mark the output file for position independent code or data invoke the linker with 1nk960 and specify p as follows pb selects libraries with position independent code and data pc selects libraries with position independent code Currently all the libraries provided with your 1960
292. through the actual arguments to a macro SHEET Cs It takes any number of arguments and expands to all but the first argument separated by commas with each argument quoted How to Debug Macros and Input Macro debugging in mpp960 is described below Displaying Macro Definitions The built in dumpdef shows what a name expands into dumpdef This macro accepts any number of arguments If called without any arguments it displays the definitions of all known names otherwise it displays the definitions of the names given The output is printed directly on the standard error output The expansion of dumpdef is void define foo Hello world gt dumpdef foo gt foo Hello world gt dumpdef define gt define lt define gt gt Macro Processor mpp960 The last example shows how built in macro definitions are displayed Tracing Macro Calls It is possible to trace macro calls and expansions using the built ins traceon and traceoff traceon traceoff When called without any arguments traceon and traceoff enables or disables tracing respectively for all defined macros When called with arguments only the named macros are affected The expansion of traceon and traceoff is void The call is displayed whenever a traced macro is called and the arguments have been collected The expansion can be displayed after the call if the expansion of the m
293. tion locates the sections consecutively in the default sequence searches only the current directory displays all warnings suppress warnings of multiple symbol definitions even if they differ in size No unresolved symbols added to file displays no version information displays no progress information displays no version information and stops linking displays all warnings continued amp Linker Ink960 gld960 Table 7 1 Linker Options continued Compress X removes the local symbols retains local symbols beginning with a dot or L Compress x removes the local symbols retains local symbols Trace symbol y sym traces a symbol indicating does not trace symbols Program database Time stamp suppression each file where it appears its type and whether the file defines or references it Z pdb _dir specifies location of program linker uses location database defined with variable G960PDB if defined Zz puts Time Zero in the output uses current time stamp time stamp Specifying Object Files When you specify the input object and library files on the command line or in the directive files provide the full object filenames with the filename extensions The linker processes the input object and library files in the following order 1 a file designated with the STARTUP directive the c option suppresses the STARTUP directive 2 the object files and libraries listed ind
294. tions whose profiles are at least lt n gt accurate The valid range for lt n gt is 0 9 The default is Q9 which ignores profile information for functions that have had source code changes since the profile was collected Q0 tells gcov960 to use a profile even for functions with profile information that is completely interpolated A profile s quality gradually drops as changes are made to the code from which it was collected and interpolation is done to make it useable by gcc960 ic960 and gcdm960 suppresses display of version copyright profile and program database used truncates displayed names to keep them within column widths prints version and continues continued amp 5 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 5 4 Table 5 2 gcov960 Options continued Option Argument Effect v960 prints version and exits Z pdb_dir identifies program database directory Default is directory identified by G960PDB gcc960 or IS60PDB ic960 See the Getting Started manual for more information on environment variables NOTE The reports produced by gcov960 may give misleading information about functions that are inlined The reports may indicate that the code of the inlined function has never been executed or may show execution counts that are unexpectedly low This occurs because the inlined code fragments are treated as part of the function they are inlined into and not as part of the original function
295. translated is replaced with a sequence of the following format in the output file xlate begin original instruction lt translation errors or warnings marked by xlate err or xlate warn gt lt translation routine gt xlate end For example given this input file eshro 10 r5 r5 mov r5 g10 xlate960 produces the following output file xlate begin eshro 10 r5 r5 xlate err Fill in register for E0 shro 10 r5 E0 shlo 227 LO 55 or 5 E0 25 xlate end Assembly Language Converter xlate960 mov r5 g10 User Interaction Translation Errors Certain instruction translations may require further action by the user For example addressing mode translations often require a scratch register to hold intermediate calculation results If the translator cannot determine an unused register for this purpose it emits a translation error into the output file All translation errors are marked with a comment of the form xlate err Error message You can display error messages on the screen by using the e switch If any translation errors occur the translator displays a message similar to this one at the end of translation xlate960 Output file t xlt requires further manual translation It is the user s responsibility to edit the output file and remove the error conditions before continuing with code migration Translation Warnings Whereas translation errors indicate invalid output
296. troduction The linker command language lets you control the linking process You can use the linker command language to e Define and allocate memory e Specify files and libraries to be linked e Group sections in memory e Place input files input sections the smallest relocatable pieces of object files into output sections sections in linker output files e Resolve global symbols to absolute addresses e Calculate checksums The linker command language consists of keywords called linker directives These directives are placed in linker directive files which are also known as link scripts and configuration files in some environments Linker directive files typically use the extension 1d You specify linker directive files when you run the linker either directly or indirectly via a compiler invocation Most of this appendix is devoted to a description of the linker directives The last section of this appendix provides some details on linker directive files and sample linker directive files The toolset includes linker directive files for various common 1960 processor evaluation boards Before using the information in the Linker Directives Reference section you should be familiar with the information in the next section which discusses other directive file elements such as expressions and operators i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide A 2 Expressions and Operators Table A 1 You can use glo
297. tted as shown below BB5 NN ATN ASN BB10 The BB10 block is created by the assembler to hold assembly language information such as assembly language source filename and local section information R_Label sections it is not intended to have assembler symbols such as a lone BB10 block The cvt960 created global_non_init module however has many assembler level globals in B10 The BB10 block is placed after the BB5 block The HP MRI specification allows other BB5 blocks to be nested inside interspersed in the line information These are usually include files The cvt960 converter does not produce nested BB5s because include file information is not available from COFF i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide The line information must have at least one NN record before any ATN or ASN records and the index for the ATN and ASN must be the same as the last NN Only lines that have code associated with them need to be present All readers can assume that any missing lines are associated with the next line specified The column offset parameter indicates the position of the high level source line The offset is taken to mean the column position of the last token of the source text associated with the machine instructions immediately following the code position indicated by ATN 7 Source file columns are numbered starting with 1 The special column offset value of 0 is defined to indicate the position of the last col
298. ttiatesheisncaehhintee a eaeaes 12 3 Directive Reference cceecceccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeseceeeeaeeeeeeeaees 12 6 Section size Printer gsize960 siz960 INVOCATION OEE EE E EEEE E E SRE EE EET 13 1 Statistical Profiler ghist960 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide viii Chapter 15 Chapter 16 STAEN AAEE EE E EE EE 14 1 How Statistical Profiling WorkS sssssseeeseessssereerrnrnsssrrree 14 2 Parameters that Effect Profiling eseessessseeeesesrsnrressrrenee 14 4 Bucket Size __bUCk_SiIZ eeetseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 14 6 Timer Frequency __timer_fre Q eseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 7 Profiling region __prof_start and __ prof_end 14 7 Resources Requirement cccccceeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 10 Library WA AMI ZA OMgsiss sent techinbti terest acedeute redhat bcew abdul 14 11 MONGGO EEE EE EE nreniad aegis 14 11 PAATI CASE E EE SON oe coe ae ea ee 14 11 IAW OGATIOMN se e aaee E E exe EAEE EEA E AEA EER 14 12 Using QMISTOGO vised stotacnt reii rae a e era e i eededd 14 13 Description of File Formats Emitted by the Library 14 15 Binary Data Ponmal sc cc2 naeata wakueen weauwad 14 16 ASGII Data Format secsi a E EEE RS 14 16 Example Usage of ghist960 cceesssseceeeeeeeeeseeeeees 14 17 Stripper gstrip960 str960 Assembly Language Converter xlate960 Naoero a MEE A Ree pers arene teen Pty rE nce aoa REED
299. ttribute Definitions for the Environmental Part n3 Description 50 Creation date and time requires one extra field x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 51 52 53 54 55 x1 Year e g 1990 x2 Month 1 12 x3 Day 1 31 x4 Hour 0 23 x5 Minute 0 59 x6 Second 0 59 The date and time are derived from the date and time of the COFF file The year is encoded as a decimal number not four hexadecimal digits There is no ASN record Command line text requires one extra field Id containing the command line The command line is derived from the cvt960 command line There is no ASN record Execution status requires one extra field xl 0 Success There is no ASN record Host environment requires one extra field x1 4 HP UX There is no ASN record Tool and version number used to create the module requires three extra fields x1 x2 and x3 defining the tool version and revision number An optional fourth field x4 is an ASCII character that defines the revision level e g A B etc The x1 field contains 210 the cvt960 tool code There is no ASN record Comments requires one extra field Id specifying the comment string There is no ASN record HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D External Part The External part contains records used to define global symbols from COFF Variable miscellaneous records are also allowed in the External part For more information on the syntax of records in the Externa
300. tttteeeeees 15 2 16 1 Instructions Translated by xlate960 ee 16 1 16 1 xlate960 Options ee ccc eeesesseeeceteeeeeeeneeseeeeees 16 3 A 1 Order of Precedence for Operators eeeeee A 2 A 2 Linker Directives cccccccceeeeeeeeseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees A 4 A 3 Memory and Section Attributes cccccceeeeeeeeees A 7 Contents A 4 SECTION Keywords 0 2 c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeee A 10 A 5 COFF Binary Representation of NOLOAD DSECT COPY Sections cccceecceseeeeeeesseeeeeeeees A 23 A 6 ELF Binary Representation of NOLOAD DSECT COPY Sections nianna eanan A 24 B 1 Common Object File Library COFL Functions B 1 B 2 Common Object File Interface Macros ce B 3 C 1 File Header Content ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees C 4 C 2 File Header Flags cccssccceeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 5 C 3 Architecture Types of File Header Flags 0 C 6 C 4 Standard Output a out File Header 0000 C 7 C 5 Section Header Contents cceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 8 C 6 Section Header FlagS cccceeeseseceeeeeeeeeeeseeees C 10 C 7 Relocation Entry Format ceccescsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 11 C 8 Relocation Types sxciiiterieiieescesucsenenervieeteeeeie C 12 C 9 Symbol Table Entry Format ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee C 17 C 10 Special Symbols in the Symbol Table 00
301. tures of some of the blocks e BB1 BB3 and BBS blocks usually occur together and in that order e BB1 blocks can be absent for modules that declare no local types e BB5 blocks immediately follow BB3 blocks in this implementation e A BBS cannot occur without a BB3 e Consecutive BB3 and BBS blocks must refer to the same module HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Block Nesting For a summary of block nesting rules see Table D 8 below Module Scope Type Definitions BB1 N and TY records Module Scope Type Definitions End BE1 High Level Module Block Begin BB3 Global Variables NN ATN8 ASN odule Scope Variables NN ATN3 ASN odule Scope Function Block Begin BB6 Local Variables NN ATN ASN odule Scope Function Block End BE6 Global Function Block Begin BB4 Local Variables NN ATN ASN Local Function Block Begin BB6 High level Local Variables NN ATN ASN Module Block Local Function Block End BE6 one for each Global Function Block End BE4 high level High Level Module Block End BE3 module Source File Block Begin BB5 NN ASN ATN line numbers in source Source File Block End BE5 Assembly Module Block Begin BB10 Compiler Generated Global External Variables NH ATK16 ASK Compiler Generated Local Variables NH ATK16 ASK Assembler Section Block Begin BB11 Assembler Section Block End BE11 Assembler Section Block Be
302. tware License Agreement or in the case of software delivered to the government in accordance with the software license agreement as defined in FAR 52 227 7013 Copyright 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 Free Software Foundation Inc Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying provided also that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language under the above conditions for modified versions Intel Corporation retains the right to make changes to these specifications at any time without notice Contact your local sales office to obtain the latest specifications before placing your order Other brands and names are the property of their respective owners Q aS rinted on reeycled paper Copyright 1992 1994 1996 1997 1998 Intel Corporation All rights reserved Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Overview Software Utilities and Related Tools cccecceeeeeeeeee COMP AMID IY odes sate teeccreaccreactieecomriantgastacattesecgedtteme saweece Compatibility Invocation Names
303. type and data type sections e bss after all other sections If you provide a SECTIONS directive the linker first locates any sections you specify then puts unassigned sections into suitably configured memory on a first fit basis keeping groups intact You should carefully study the link map after you link your executable If you do not like the arrangement use the techniques discussed below to give the linker explicit directions on how to allocate your application You can use the v linker option to display the order in which it allocates output sections and the addresses it chooses for the sections SECTIONS Defining Output Sections Use the SECTIONS directive to e combine the input sections into output sections e locate the output sections in memory e create and initialize symbols e initialize unassigned memory e locate the entry point Linker Command Language The syntax is n ECTIONS GROUP addr spec opens an optional GROUP block o section addr spec ns type statements fi11 gt mem attr Ponsi mem attr closes the optional GROUP block Eeen GROUP specifies sections to be treated as one unit See Table A 4 addr spec is a starting address For more information on this subject see the description for the B and T section start address options in Chapter 7 o section defines an output section The colon is required ns type is the DSECT NOLOAD or COPY nonstandard t
304. ude ldfcn h int ldahread ldptr filehead LDFILE ldptr FILHDR filehead Discussion To read an open file header use 1dfhread The object file header associated with 1dptr is put into memory beginning at filehead The ldfhread function returns SUCCESS or FAILURE defined in ldfcn h indicating whether the read operation is successful To access file header fields without a function call use HEADER ldptr defined in 1dfcn h The macro returns no value B 5 B 6 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Idgetname Retrieves a name from the object file symbol table include lt stdio h gt include ldfcn h char ldgetname ldptr symbol LDFILE ldptr SYMENT symbol Discussion To retrieve a name from the string table use ldgetname The returned address points to a static buffer local to ldgetname To save the name copy the static buffer since the next 1dgetname call overwrites the static buffer A NULL returned address indicates that the name cannot be retrieved when e The string table cannot be found e The name is too long for the amount of memory allocated to the string table e The string table appears not to be a string table For example an auxiliary entry passed to 1dgetname can apparently refer to a name in a nonexistent string table e The offset into the string table is beyond the end of the string table For example you can call 1dgetname i
305. ules by providing a short notation for the common subsets of more general types The interpretation of built in types by cvt 960 is shown in Table D 3 The following assumptions relating to typedefs are made by HP and MRI tools e Type char is assumed to be signed e The size assumed for a pointer is the natural size for the target i e 1960 4 minimum address units HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Built in Types Mnemonic Definition Default Type Name 0 unknown type UNKNOWN TYPE 1 V void procedure returning void void 2 B byte 8 bit signed signed char 3 C char 8 bit unsigned unsigned char 4 H halfword 16 bit signed signed short int continued amp HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Table D 3 HP MRI IEEE 695 Object file Built in Types continued 5 6 7 10 11 12 15 26 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 42 Mnemonic I int L long M F float D double K king size J jump to Definition 16 bit unsigned 32 bit signed 32 bit unsigned 32 bit floating point 64 bit floating point extended precision floating point code location reserved for future use pointer to unknown type pointer to procedure returning void pointer to 8 bit signed pointer to 8 bit unsigned pointer to 16 bit signed point to 16 bit unsigned point to 32 bit signed pointer to 32 bit unsigned pointer to 32 bit floating point pointer to 64 bit floating point p
306. umn on the line Because column information is not available from COFF the column is 0 The BB10 block carries the information derived by the assembler from a file not produced by a compiler or one that did not put in debug information The BB10 block has the section information on a module basis as opposed to the linker s combined sections this allows a tool to know the part of a section that came from a particular module Also any local or global assembly language symbols are shown here It is formatted as shown below BB11 BB10 NN ATN ASN where the BB11 block contains the section information as described earlier in this manual BB10 blocks may be nested for include files The name index for the NN ATN and ASN records must match NOTE COFF lacks module membership information for global uninitialized variables so cvt960 produces the pseudo module global_non_init for them HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format Miscellaneous Records Miscellaneous records provide a flexible and extensible method for communicating information generated by a compiler or other language translator directly to a debugger or other consumer tool via the object file Information in miscellaneous records is classified according to a coding system defined below The content and meaning of each miscellaneous information category can be defined to suit a wide range of information needs and new miscellaneous information categories can be defined as
307. uring the conversion converter lists the action taking place displays on stdout the converter version number and the date and time the converter was created then continues processing displays on stdout the converter version number and the date and time the converter was created then stops processing removes the local symbols generated by the gcc960 compiler uses Time Zero instead of the current time and date for the COFF output file time stamp Time Zero is 4 00 31 December 1969 Output File Specification You can direct the converted output either to overwrite the input or to produce a different file e To put the converted output in another file preserving the input file follow the input filename with the output filename in the invocation For example the following puts the big endian conversion of 1file o into bfile o cof960 b 1lfile o bfile o 3 3 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 3 4 e To overwrite the input files specify the p option When converting the file contents in place you can provide multiple input files for each converter invocation Separate the input files with spaces For example the following converts filel o file2 o0 and file3 o from little endian to big endian cof960 bp filel o file2 o file3 o COFF to IEEE 695 Converter cvt960 The COFF to IEEE converter cvt960 converts files in Common Object File Format COFF to IEEE 695 format The IEEE 695
308. ution starting address This expression requires BE BF delimiters SBE n1 SBF E2C7 Record type nl Value defining the execution starting address in minimum address units Module End ME The ME record defines the end of the module and must be the last record in the module ME HP MPI IEEE 695 Format Object File Semantics This section describes the HP MRI IEEE 695 format object file semantics The format shows the records by record header for example NN is a name index record Records enclosed in square brackets and are optional records enclosed in curly braces and are repeatable 0 or more times mo HP MRI IEEE 695 Object File Format D AD Extension Part and Environment Part The AD Extension part and the Environment part constitute attribute records describing the file its contents and its creation The format of the two sections is shown below NN ATN ASN where at least one NN must be present before any ATN and the name index for the ATN must be the same as the last NN Public External Part The Public External part contains records describing public and external symbols by name type and address The format of the records is shown below Public NI ATI ASI where the name index for the NI ATI and ASI records must match in each triplet It is not possible to have more than one ATI or ASI record for any name A vmisc may follow any public Section
309. version of the ghist960 run time library IxWorks version of the ghist960 run time library A variable defined in the ghist960 library that may be modified by the user i e _buck_size Hardware that runs CTOOLS and or Tornado Hardware that runs application under test and or IxWorks Milliseconds Beginning of the application s text instruction section End of the application s text instruction section Instruction Pointer hardware timer 1 not available on some processors Timer Count Register 1 Timer Reload Register 1 Timer Mode Register Interrupt Mask How Statistical Profiling Works Statistical profiling uses a sampling technique that records the IP at fixed intervals The recorded IP is correlated with a hit counter that contains the number of times the IP has fallen within its range of memory This range of memory is referred to as a bucket When profiling terminates each counter will contain a value that represents the frequency of occurrence that the IP spent within each counter s bucket Statistical Profiler ghist960 If enough samples were taken these values will be statistically significant such that they will accurately show where the IP was most of the time In the example shown in Figure 14 2 a simple function is assembled and the resulting assembly occupies exactly 32 bytes The bucket size for this example is 16 bytes If the IP resides within the range of 0x0 0x10 during sampling the hit counter for
310. void binl void bin3 void bind void bin7 void bind void binll void binl3 void run_simul 5000 volatile int i WAIT WAIT WAIT WAIT WAIT WAIT WAIT ee ee eo ee ation void int level pos 6 for i 0 i lt DELAY delay for level if rand pos else pos switch pos case case case case case case case PRrRoONAOWEH Wr 1 level lt 5 6 2 binl break bin3 break bin5 break bin7 break bin9 break binll break binl3 break level 14 17 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Table 14 12 14 18 void main int sim for sim 0 sim lt 1000 sim run_simulation End of example c For this example a hypothetical scenario for profiling is created Example Parameters Library parameter Value Explanation _timer_freq 0x01 Set sampling rate at 500 mSec _prof_start bin Start profiling at the address where _bin1 is defined _prof_end run_simulation end profiling up to the address where run_simulation is defined The gcc960 command line will look as follows gcc960 AJF Fcoff g Tmcyjx lhs example c defsym prof_start _binl defsym prof_end _run_simulation defsym __buck_size 0xl o exampl After example c has been successfully compiled and linked it must be run on the host If using MON960 this could be don
311. whose names are longer than eight characters long_name_1 and another_one Thus the string table has the format shown in Figure C 3 C 41 C 42 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide Figure C 3 String Table Index OSD321 The size of the string table in Figure C 3 is 28 bytes which is equal to 4 bytes plus one byte for each character including the null terminator The index of long_name_1 in the string table is 4 and the index of another_one is 16 Access Routines Access routines found in the common object file library can be used for reading a common object file These routines insulate the calling program from having to know the structure of the object file Archive Library Format Figure C 4 represents a typical archive The figure shows an object library consisting of n members The definitions of four elements constitute the common archive file format CAFF e archive identification string e one or more members e symbol table e name or spelling pool The following sections describe each of these elements in greater detail Common Object File Format COFF and Common Archive File Format CAFF Figure C 4 An Archive Library Archive Identification String a Archive Header Member 0 Symbol Table Archive Header Member 1 Extended Filename Table Member 2 Archive Header a Member Data Member K Member n 1
312. wn in Table 2 3 Table 2 3 Verbose Modifier Information Display Control Screen Display Meaning d delete d name removes a member m move m name moves a member within the archive r replace andu_ r name replaces a member update a name adds a member x extract x name extracts a member into an external file p print prints the member name and contents t toc prints the archive table of contents NOTE name is the name of the processed archive member Example The following example replaces existing members in 1ibx a with the corresponding files in the current directory placing new members before filel o As new members are added and existing members replaced the archiver generates appropriate messages arc960 vrb filel o libx a o 2 19 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 2 20 On a Windows host the output is filel o Cs0 file2 o file3 o file4 o ooo OK V v960 Version Option Displays the archiver version number and creation date Coco Discussion To display a sign on message during archiving use v After displaying the message the archiver continues processing To display the message without archiving use v960 You need not provide any other input After displaying the message the archiver stops The message includes the version number of the archiver and the date and time the archiver was created Example The following command dis
313. x as above n2 expression for value etc A special case is where the first parameter in the miscellaneous record cluster after the classification code is a string In this case the initial string is encoded in the first ATN of the miscellaneous record cluster right after the parameter indicating the number of additional ATN ASN records in the cluster A procedure miscellaneous record cluster matching this description with illustrative classification code 99 is illustrated below code 99 stringl valuel The miscellaneous record would be represented in this specification as follows NN SFO index null_name ATN SF1 CE index 00 3E 63 1 stringl ASN E2 SCE index valuel D 41 D 42 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide NOTE string2 is included in the first ATN record of the cluster Optional Parameter Fields Some miscellaneous records have optional parameters These are denoted in the parameter list as parameter If some optional parameters in a record are present but others are not all of the optional parameter slots preceding a supplied optional parameter must be accounted for Missing optional parameter s whose values are numbers are indicated using the TEEE 695 unknown code 80 in the slot corresponding to the missing parameter If the missing optional parameter is a string a 80 length string would appear in the ATN record correspond
314. y entry point esymbol symbol is a symbol name in a text type section in the output file Discussion To define the primary entry point symbol in the output file use e The linker uses the following order of precedence to select an entry point 1 eon the command line 2 with e unspecified ENTRY in the linker directive file 3 with e and ENTRY unspecified the first appearance of start or _main in your program 4 with start and _main undefined the first address in text Example The following command links file o for execution on a Cx target and specifies the symbol midpoint as the entry point 1nk960 Tmepcx e midpoint file o 7 33 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 34 F Format Specifies the COFF ELF or b out format for the output Fooff specifies COFF output Felf specifies ELF output Fbout specifies b out output Discussion To specify an output format use the F option g1d960 or g1d960 Fbout generates b out format output The Fbout option is not valid when the linker is invoked with 1nk960 g1d960 Fcoff or 1nk960 generates COFF output g1d960 Felf or 1nk960 Felf generates ELF output The output format generates the default output filename see the Linker Invocation section and the o option in this section The default format for gld960 is b out the default format for Ink960 is COFF Example The following generates a COFF program g1d960 Fcoff filel o file2
315. y a contiguous stream of memory By default these profile counters are allocated to the same memory as other common variables but they can be allocated to any memory using the wildcard linker section directive 7 19 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide 7 20 Environment Variables Environment variables set default operating parameters such as search paths and the target architecture Define the environment variables before invoking the linker UNIX users must define the environment variables with the set or setenv command at the operating system prompt in script files or in a bootup file such as cshre login or profile Windows users define the environment variables at the operating system prompt in batch files in the autoexec bat file or using the Control Panel For more information on the environment variables used by the i960 processor assembler and software utilities see the i960 Processor Assembler User s Guide For more information on defining environment variables see your host system documentation The linker requires you to define the following environment variables G960BASE specifies base directory for invoking the linker as g1d960 I960BASE specifies base directory for invoking the linker as 1nk960 G960ARCH specifies the target architecture libraries for the g1d960 invocation I960ARCH specifies the target architecture libraries for the 1nk960 invocation G960LIB spe
316. ype these may have optional parentheses statements describe the section contents including filenames input section names keywords listed in Table A 4 assignments and other expressions described in the Linker Command Language section The braces are required even with no statements An empty output section definition contains all otherwise unallocated input sections with the same name o section as the output section fill is a two byte initialization value for spaces between input sections in the output section A 9 i960 Processor Software Utilities User s Guide mem attr errors specifies a memory region either by name or by attribute as described in the MEMORY Configuring Memory Regions section The gt is required For a list of the attributes see Table A 4 NOTES Specify a starting address or a memory region or neither but not both Conflicting group and section specifications cause syntax In a SECTIONS directive you can use the keywords summarized in Table A 4 Table A 4 Keyword ALIGN BYTE COMMON COPY CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS DSECT ENTRY FILL GROUP LONG NOLOAD SHORT SECTION Keywords Operation returns the next address that fits the specified boundary puts a byte value at the current address locates uninitialized data copies output section data to the output file without relocating the section or allocating any memory creates a symbol for each input f

i960 Processor Software Utilities User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents